Europaudvalget 2023
KOM (2023) 0177
Offentligt
2685286_0001.png
EUROPEAN
COMMISSION
Brussels, 29.3.2023
SWD(2023) 178 final
COMMISSION STAFF WORKING DOCUMENT
IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Accompanying the document
Proposal for a
DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
amending Directives 2009/102/EC and (EU) 2017/1132 as regards further expanding and
upgrading the use of digital tools and processes in company law
{COM(2023) 177 final} - {SEC(2023) 377 final} - {SWD(2023) 177 final} -
{SWD(2023) 179 final}
EN
EN
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
Table of Contents
1.
INTRODUCTION: POLITICAL AND LEGAL CONTEXT ............................................................... 1
1.1. Political context ................................................................................................. 1
1.2. Legal context ..................................................................................................... 3
1.3. Scope of the impact assessment ........................................................................ 4
2.
PROBLEM DEFINITION .................................................................................................................... 4
2.1. What are the problems? ..................................................................................... 4
2.2. Reliable company data is not sufficiently available and/or comparable cross-
border ................................................................................................................. 6
2.3. Direct use of company data is hindered/not possible when setting up cross-
border subsidiaries and branches ..................................................................... 12
2.4. Direct use of company information is hindered or not possible in all cross-border
activities and situations, including administrative and court procedures ........ 14
2.5. What are the problem drivers? ........................................................................ 16
2.5.1. Company data is not available in business registers and/or cross-border through
BRIS ................................................................................................................ 16
2.5.2. Limited functionalities in BRIS (e.g. search criteria, no interconnection with
other EU interconnection systems) .................................................................. 18
2.5.3. Different intensity and procedures in Member States to verify the correctness of
company information before it is entered in business registers ...................... 18
2.5.4. Company data originating from other Member States’ business registers is not
recognised cross-border and subject to formalities ......................................... 19
2.5.5. Divergent company extracts ............................................................................ 20
2.6. How likely is the problem to persist? .............................................................. 21
3.
WHY SHOULD THE EU ACT? ........................................................................................................ 22
3.1. Legal basis ....................................................................................................... 22
3.2. Subsidiarity: Necessity of EU action ............................................................... 22
3.3. Subsidiarity: Added value of EU action .......................................................... 23
4.
OBJECTIVES: WHAT IS TO BE ACHIEVED? ............................................................................... 23
4.1. General objectives ........................................................................................... 23
4.2. Specific objectives ........................................................................................... 24
4.2.1. Increasing the amount and improving the reliability of company data available in
business registers and/or BRIS ........................................................................ 24
4.2.2. Enabling direct use of company data available in business registers when setting
up cross-border branches/subsidiaries and in other cross-border activities and
situations .......................................................................................................... 24
5.
WHAT ARE THE AVAILABLE POLICY OPTIONS? .................................................................... 25
5.1. What is the baseline from which options are assessed? .................................. 25
5.2. Description of the policy options .................................................................... 26
5.2.1. Policy options 1 to make more company information available in business
registers and/or BRIS ...................................................................................... 26
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
5.2.2. Policy options 2 to interconnect BRIS with other systems and enable better
searches............................................................................................................ 28
5.2.3. Policy options 3 to ensure an adequate verification of company data before it is
entered into the business register ..................................................................... 29
5.2.4. Policy options 4 to enable direct use of company data from business registers in
cross-border situations ..................................................................................... 30
5.3. Options discarded at an early stage ................................................................. 32
6.
WHAT ARE THE IMPACTS OF THE POLICY OPTIONS AND HOW DO THEY COMPARE? . 32
6.1. Policy options 1 to make more company information available in business
registers and/or BRIS ...................................................................................... 33
6.2. Policy options 2 to interconnect BRIS with other systems and enable better
searches............................................................................................................ 36
6.3. Policy options 3 to ensure an adequate verification of company data before it is
entered into the business register ..................................................................... 38
6.4. Policy options 4 to enable direct use of company data from business registers in
cross-border situations ..................................................................................... 40
6.5. Comparison of impacts .................................................................................... 43
7.
PREFERRED OPTION ...................................................................................................................... 44
7.1. Package of preferred measures ........................................................................ 44
7.2. Impacts of the package .................................................................................... 44
7.3. Application of the ‘one in, one out’ approach ................................................. 48
8.
HOW WILL ACTUAL IMPACTS BE MONITORED AND EVALUATED? .................................. 48
ANNEX 1: PROCEDURAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 50
ANNEX 2: STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION (SYNOPSIS REPORT) ................................................ 55
ANNEX 3: WHO IS AFFECTED AND HOW? .......................................................................................... 69
ANNEX 4: ANALYTICAL METHODS ..................................................................................................... 73
ANNEX 5: INTERVENTION LOGIC ....................................................................................................... 136
ANNEX 6: NUMBER OF COMPANIES, BRANCHES AND SUBSIDIARIES ..................................... 137
ANNEX 7: ESTIMATED COSTS - FOR ELECTRONIC COMPANY EXTRACTS ACROSS THE EU 143
ANNEX 8: ESTIMATED COSTS FOR APOSTILLES AND CERTIFIED TRANSLATION ACROSS THE
EU MEMBER STATES ................................................................................................................... 144
ANNEX 9: EU RULES IN OTHER POLICY AREAS RELATED TO THIS INITIATIVE .................... 145
ANNEX 10: OPTIONS DISCARDED AT AN EARLY STAGE .............................................................. 148
ANNEX 11: BUSINESS REGISTERS INTERCONNECTION SYSTEM (BRIS) ................................... 151
ANNEX 12: OVERVIEW OF NATIONAL RULES ................................................................................. 155
ANNEX 13: THE SME TEST – SUMMARY OF RESULTS ................................................................... 158
ANNEX 14: RESULTS OF THE SME PANEL CONSULTATION ON UPGRADING DIGITAL
COMPANY LAW ............................................................................................................................. 160
ANNEX 15: LIST OF MEETINGS UNDER TARGETED CONSULTATIONS AND VIRTUAL MEETINGS
.......................................................................................................................................................... 167
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0004.png
Glossary
Term or acronym
AML Directive
Meaning or definition
Anti-Money Laundering Directive - Directive 2015/849 on the
prevention of the use of the financial system for the purposes of
money laundering or terrorist financing as amended by Directive
(EU) 2018/843
Business Registers Interconnection System established by
Directive 2012/17/EU
Beneficial Ownership Registers
established by Directive 2015/849
Interconnection
System
BRIS
BORIS
CLEG
eIDAS Regulation
EPREL
ESAP
EUID
FATF
ICLEG
Company Law Expert Group, consisting of Member State
representatives responsible for company law issues
Regulation (EU) 910/2014 on electronic identification and trust
services for electronic transactions in the internal market
European Product Registry for Energy Labelling
European single access point
European Unique Identification Number
Financial Action Task Force
Informal Company Expert Group on company law and corporate
governance, consisting of company law professors and
practitioners
Interconnection of insolvency registers
Land Registers Interconnection system
Power of Attorney document
Regulation (EU) 2018/1724 establishing a single digital gateway
to provide access to information, to procedures and to assistance
and problem-solving services
Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union
IRI
LRI
PoA
SDG Regulation
TFEU
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0005.png
1.
I
NTRODUCTION
: P
OLITICAL AND LEGAL CONTEXT
1.1.
Political context
The Single Market has generated new opportunities for European companies and consumers,
created millions of jobs and strengthened the productivity and global competitiveness of European
companies over the last decades. The COVID-19 pandemic and, more recently, the war in Ukraine,
highlighted the dependence of the European economy on external factors and underlined the value
of the Single Market for the European economy. The
European Council conclusions of 24-25
March 2022
highlighted that “the
Single Market remains one of the European Union’s primary
assets for sustainable growth and job creation, and is key to accelerating its green and digital
transitions as well as strengthening the resilience of our economies”,
and, in particular, called for
implementing the Industrial and SME Strategies,
“completing the Single Market, in particular for
digital and services”, “preventing bottlenecks as well as removing remaining unjustified barriers
and administrative burdens and avoiding new ones”.
In the Single Market, there are around 26 million enterprises
1
employing 133 million persons. The
overwhelming majority of these enterprises are micro, small and medium-sized enterprises
(SMEs)
2
. They need a predictable legal framework that is conducive to growth and adapted to face
the new economic and social challenges in an increasingly digital world. Such framework should
provide companies with an enabling environment: to be set up, to operate, to expand across borders
and, in general, to make most of their potential without unjustified barriers and administrative
burden. EU company law plays an important role in laying down such a framework.
The company law framework, which encompasses the roles and responsibilities of the business
registers, needs to respond to new challenges. The developments in digitalisation and technology
have fundamentally changed how business registers operate, and how business registers, companies
and stakeholders, in particular public authorities, interact with one another on company law related
issues. These changes were further amplified by the recent COVID-19 pandemic, which proved that
digital tools are essential to ensure the continuity of business operations and companies’
interactions with business registers and authorities.
In a more digitalised world, transparency and data about companies have gained a new dimension.
Originally, the purpose of the public disclosure requirements about company data in the business
registers was to protect third parties such as creditors. Today, the call for transparency goes much
beyond this. Companies and investors need to get access to company data in order to find business
partners and investment targets across the Single Market. Furthermore, whether it is due to the
Panama Papers, Lux leaks or issues related to posted workers and social unfairness, civil society
increasingly asks for more transparency about companies
3
. In addition, the role of business registers
has developed beyond their traditional role of registering corporate entities. Today, there are
increasing demands for access to more reliable company data from business registers. There is also
an increasing need for a close co-operation with other public authorities across the Single Market, in
particular those responsible for anti-money laundering/countering the financing of terrorism,
Eurostat, Business Demography Statistics 2022 define enterprise as ‘the
smallest combination of legal units that is an
organisational unit producing goods or services…. An enterprise carries out one or more activities at one or more
locations’.
An enterprise may thus be a sole legal unit but also a combination of legal units;
2
According to the latest June 2022 annual report on SMEs, there were approximately 22.8 million SMEs active in the
EU-27 and these SMEs accounted for 99.8% of all enterprises in the non-financial business sector (i.e. NACE sectors of
the economy except some such as agriculture, financial and insurance activities, human health and social work
activities, education, arts, other service activities); SME Performance Review (europa.eu).
3
Study on “Letterbox companies: overview of the phenomenon and existing measures”;
Letterbox companies -
Publications Office of the EU (europa.eu).
1
1
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0006.png
taxation or law enforcement, e.g. to create better conditions to counteract abuse or fraud, or to
effectively implement EU sanctions (e.g. against Russia or Belarus).
The EU company law was recently updated in response to digital developments to provide rules for
fully online formation of limited liability companies, registration of branches and fully online
submission of documents in the business registers
4
. The initiative subject to this impact assessment
upgrades the EU digital company law further by addressing the need to increase the availability of
company information in business registers, in particular at cross-border level, and to remove
administrative barriers and burdens through the use of digital tools and processes when companies
and public authorities use such information.
In a market characterised by the absence of internal borders, being able to access and use company
data cross-border easily and without administrative burden underpins the economic activity and is
essential to create a safer and more favourable economic environment for companies, consumers,
and other stakeholders (investors, creditors, employees). Such conditions, in turn, are essential to
ease doing business for companies, in particular SMEs, help them find ways to explore and expand
to other EU markets, and therefore contribute to an economic rebound following the pandemic.
Contribution to the political priorities and to other political initiatives
The
Communication
2030 Digital Compass: the European way for the Digital Decade
5
called for
intensification of the ongoing work to accelerate Europe’s digital transformation and stressed the
importance of providing key public services online for European citizens and businesses. In this
context, it set a target that 100% of key public services should be available online for European
citizens and businesses by 2030. It also stressed the importance of creating connected public
administrations, including through the use of the
once-only principle.
The importance of digital
tools for businesses to access information, interact with authorities and enjoy access to justice, and
the need for appropriate tools for authorities and legal professionals to communicate, exchange or
submit documents securely cross-border was also strongly underlined in the
Communication
Digitalisation of justice in the European Union - A toolbox of opportunities
6
.
This proposal is included in the
2023 Commission Work Programme
as one of the key actions
under the Commission’s headline ambition of “Europe fit for the digital age”
7
. Under this headline
ambition, the planned initiative will directly contribute to the objectives set out in these
Communications and in that way, it will be also very relevant in responding to the call from the
European Council on
completing the Single Market, in particular for digital and services.
The Communications
Updating the 2020 New Industrial Strategy
8
and
SME Strategy for a
sustainable and digital Europe
9
underlined the importance of strengthening the resilience of the
Single Market and the role of a well-functioning Single Market to accelerate the recovery after the
pandemic, and highlighted the important role that SMEs play in that context and in leading the
green and digital transitions. The SME strategy, especially, mentioned that “the
Commission will
consult and assess the need for additional company law measures to facilitate cross-border
expansion and scale-up by SMEs”.
The planned initiative will contribute to these strategies, in
particular by aiming to abolish and reduce formalities in relation to use of company information in
cross-border situations and to make the setting up of subsidiaries and branches in other Member
States less time-consuming and more cost-effective. This will be very relevant in the context of the
4
5
Directive (EU) 2019/1151
amending Directive (EU) 2017/1132
COM(2021) 118 final.
6
COM(2020) 710 final.
7
COM(2022) 548 final
8
COM(2021) 350 final.
9
COM (2020) 103 final.
2
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0007.png
call by the European Council to “[….]
remove remaining unjustified barriers and administrative
burdens and avoiding new ones”.
Finally, the planned initiative can also contribute to the fight against abusive or fraudulent
companies, to the implementation of EU rules on anti-money laundering/countering the financing of
terrorism, building on the Financial Action Task Force (FATF) recommendation on transparency
and beneficial ownership of legal persons
10
and to the effective implementation of EU sanctions
against e.g. Russia or Belarus or any other possible country,
by creating better conditions for the
imposition of such measures,
in particular through enhanced ex-ante controls about company data
and increased transparency.
1.2.
Legal context
EU company law rules
EU company law rules laid down in the
Codified Company Law Directive
11
set out provisions
regarding the formation, capital and disclosure requirements, and domestic and cross-border
operations (e.g. mergers) of limited liability companies.
In the last decades, there has been a number of developments at EU level to bring EU company law
rules in line with digital developments. After first steps towards electronic filing and electronic
copies in 2007
12
, an important milestone was the creation of the
Business Registers
Interconnection System (BRIS)
in 2012
13
. BRIS became operational in 2017. Since then, Member
States’ business registers have gradually connected to BRIS, with the last Member State joining at
the beginning of 2022. Now BRIS interconnects all Member States’ business registers. It gathers
certain information about EU limited liability companies, which is harmonised through common
disclosure requirements in the Codified Company Law Directive, directly from Member States’
business registers and makes it available to the public at EU level through a single access point at
the European e-Justice Portal
14
. In particular, BRIS gives free of charge access to a set of company
information such as the name and legal form of the company, its registered office, the registration
number, and, more recently, also to information, e.g. on company’s legal representatives, its cross-
border branches, status and object of the company
15
. Furthermore, BRIS provides access to other
company information, for which Member States may charge a fee, including e.g. instruments of
constitution, accounting documents, the amount of capital subscribed, winding up of the company,
declaration of nullity by the courts or termination of a liquidation of a company.
BRIS also provides secure means for exchange of information between business registers on certain
cross-border issues regulated by the Codified Company Law Directive (e.g. regarding cross-border
mergers), offering a technical means for cooperation between business registers and for
implementation of the once-only principle in cross-border situations.
Most recently, the
Digitalisation Directive
16
introduced fully online formation of companies,
registration of branches and fully online submission of documents in the business register. It also
made more company data available free of charge from business registers (e.g. on legal
representatives, cross-border branches, status and object of the company) and established an
10
FATF recommendation 24, as revised in March 2022, includes requirements on company information in business
registers, so called “basic information”;
Documents - Financial Action Task Force (FATF) (fatf-gafi.org).
11
Directive (EU) 2017/1132
codified several company law Directives (from 1982 to 2012) into one legislative act.
12
Directive 2003/58/EC
amending Council Directive 68/151/EEC.
13
Directive 2012/17/EU
amending Council Directive 89/666/EEC and Directives 2005/56/EC and 2009/101/EC.
14
European e-Justice Portal – Business registers – search for a company in the EU (europa.eu).
15
Member States had to transpose most of these new provisions of the Digitalisation Directive by August 2022.
16
Directive (EU) 2019/1151
amending Directive (EU) 2017/1132.
3
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0008.png
exchange of information between Member States on disqualified directors. Also, the
Mobility
Directive
17
that regulates cross-border conversions, mergers and divisions, enhanced the use of
BRIS in terms of introducing new exchanges between business registers (e.g. on cross-border
conversions and divisions).
1.3.
Scope of the impact assessment
The initiative subject to this impact assessment upgrades the digital company law further to
address
the needs of direct users,
such as companies, other stakeholders and public authorities, to access
and to use in the cross-border context reliable and up-to-date official company data, based on legal
obligations, from business registers. This company data includes e.g. company name, legal form,
company’s legal representatives, instruments of constitution or accounting documents.
This initiative
does not cover the re-use of company information
from business registers
for
commercial and non-commercial purposes.
The latter issue is regulated by the Open Data
Directive
18
. Therefore, the so-called “intermediaries” i.e. private service providers who use
company data from business registers as an input to their own commercial products and services, as
well as non-commercial intermediaries, are outside the scope of the planned initiative. Similarly,
this initiative is about company information based on legal obligations and, thus, does not cover
commercial information about companies, e.g. concerning their credit history, their products or
distribution channels. In addition, this initiative does not cover the obligation of business registers
as statistical business registers, which is regulated by the Regulation on European business
statistics
19
.
2.
P
ROBLEM DEFINITION
2.1.
What are the problems?
Business registers are established by law to facilitate the interaction of companies operating under
the jurisdiction of the register with the Member State´s authorities, other companies and the public,
both when those businesses are established and throughout the course of their lifespan
20
. Company
registration and information in business registers are crucial for ensuring an accountable,
transparent and viable business environment. Companies, when they are formed, have a legal
obligation to be registered in the business registers. The instrument of constitution and the
subsequent registration in the business register gives the company the characteristic of a legal
personality. Companies also need to file (submit) to the business register updated information
throughout their life cycle. This company information in business registers has legal value, i.e. it
can be relied on – at least to a certain extent - by third parties. Therefore, business registers are a
primary source of trustworthy information about companies in the Single Market.
Traditionally, business registers have been operating at national level and most were created well
before the Treaty of Rome and the emergence of digital technologies, in the 19
th
-20
th
century
21
.
However, with the growing number of companies expanding economic activities to other Member
States’ markets through e.g. cross-border mergers, establishing cross-border subsidiaries or
17
18
Directive (EU) 2019/2121
amending Directive (EU) 2017/1132.
Directive (EU) 2019/1024.
19
Regulation (EU) 2019/2152.
20
UNCITRAL Legislative Guide on Key Principles of a Business Registry.
21
Study on the disclosure and cross-border use of company data, and digital developments related to company law
(Milieu Consulting SRL) 2022 – hereinafter referred to as “supporting study”
4
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0009.png
branches, trading cross-border or providing cross-border services in the EU, there is an increasing
demand for access to
official and reliable
information on companies in a cross-border context and
for use of this company data for different purposes, by companies, business registers or authorities.
The problem is that access to and use of reliable company information from business registers in
cross-border situations is still hindered by barriers. Firstly, company data that stakeholders as direct
users, including authorities, are looking for is not yet sufficiently available in national business
registers and/or cross-border through BRIS. Secondly, the direct use of such company data in cross-
border situations (including administrative procedures, court proceedings) and setting up cross-
border subsidiaries or branches) is still hindered or not possible.
This means that, even if the economy is more and more integrated, companies, including SMEs and
other stakeholders, including public authorities and courts do not have yet optimal conditions – as
regards the access to and use of company data - to be part of cross-border operations or procedures
in the single market. For instance, possibilities for companies, and in particular SMEs to expand
cross-border can be hindered if they cannot find easily accessible and comparable information about
business partners or potential clients in other Member States and face costs in searching for this
information. In a similar way, if creditors and investors have difficulty finding information about
companies from other Member States, they might be less willing to search out businesses from
other Member States to finance or invest in, and this can negatively impact companies including
SMEs who are in need of such financing and investment.
The evidence for this initiative, including about problems and obstacles encountered by
stakeholders, was gathered through wide-ranging consultation activities. These included a public
consultation (83 respondents), a specific consultation of SMEs through an “SME panel”
22
(158
respondents, majority from SMEs in the form of limited liability companies), surveys (with
business registers, public authorities, legal practitioners, business and financial organisations and
individual companies
23
) and two virtual workshops (with business registers and companies) carried
out in the context of an external contractor study
24
for this initiative, and targeted interviews (with
key EU level stakeholders and with legal practitioners specialised in company law). Overall, the
results of these consultation activities can be seen as providing a reliable picture of views of
stakeholders because the information was gathered in parallel through different targeted channels to
ensure that sufficient numbers of stakeholders were reached, and similar feedback was received in
all of them. The interviews and workshops with stakeholders confirmed the findings of
consultations and surveys, and also provided some real case examples of specific costs.
The problem tree below illustrates the main drivers, problems and consequences. The following
sub-chapters describe the problems and the drivers in more detail.
22
The 'SME panel consultations' are a tool that allows Commission service to reach SMEs in a targeted way and are
organised in cooperation with the partners in the Enterprise Europe Network, a support network for small and medium-
sized enterprises (SMEs) bringing together, among others, chambers of commerce and industry, regional development
organisations or innovation support organisations.
23
25 business registers, 11 legal professionals, 1 financial institution, 3 business organisations, 20 public authorities
(tax and labour) and 140 companies took part in these surveys.
24
Study on the disclosure and cross-border use of company data, and digital developments related to Company Law. by
Milieu Consulting srl.
Company law and corporate governance (europa.eu)
5
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0010.png
Problem tree
2.2.
Reliable company data is not sufficiently available and/or comparable cross-
border
Need for more company data unsatisfied
Investors, creditors, consumers or any other third party, but also companies and in particular SMEs,
need to have access to reliable information about companies in the Single Market for several
reasons. According to the respondents to the public consultation, the most important reason to have
access to company data is to find or check information about a company, as a creditor, a business
partner or a legal professional. Similarly, 75% of companies responding to the surveys for the
supporting study
25
indicated that they needed company data cross-border to find information about
potential business partners; 33% - for benchmarking/market analysis purposes, and 32% - to
identify legal representatives. International surveys also confirm the use of business registers’ data
for business facilitation purposes
26
and in particular to check the consistency of information
provided by companies (e.g. suppliers and/or customers), or as part of more detailed due diligence
research into a company
27
.
Different authorities and courts also need to have data about companies to carry out many tasks
related to administrative and judicial procedures. Yet, 70% of authorities responding to the public
consultation confirmed they faced difficulties when accessing or verifying data about companies
from business registers in another Member State. They also need company data to more easily
identify and, therefore, take more effective actions to implement EU sanctions or against abusive,
25
26
Surveys in the context of the supporting study.
The International Business Registers Report 2019 (ebra.be).
27
Valuing the user benefits of Companies House data: policy summary (publishing.service.gov.uk).
6
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0011.png
fraudulent companies, e.g. abusive letterbox companies. According to the 2019 study on letterbox
companies
28
, numerous companies owned by foreign majority shareholders were located at the
same address in the EU, e.g. in Latvia, Czechia, the Netherlands, Luxembourg, Slovakia and
Denmark up to several hundreds of companies were located at the same addresses. The public
authorities (mainly tax authorities) responding the supporting study survey confirmed that they
needed data about companies from other Member States to check information (95%, 19
respondents), establish taxes (70%, 14 respondents) and to identify legal representatives, detect
fraud and money laundering/terrorist financing and carry out controls (60%)
29
.
The problem is that stakeholders encounter difficulties when looking for and accessing data about
companies from other Member States. For instance, companies reported such difficulties when
expanding their business in another Member State in the evidence gathered in the context of the
2020 Single Market Strategy
30
, and this problem was seen as prominent especially among SMEs.
For instance, for 53% of SMEs, “identifying business partners abroad” was too difficult according
to the 2017/2018 Annual Report on European SMEs
31
. “Insufficient legal/financial information
about potential business partners in other countries” was also seen as one of the significant
obstacles by 59% of respondents to the 2019 Eurochambres survey
32
, it being particularly important
for companies with less than 10 employees.
As regards company information available in business registers, which is the focus of this initiative,
a majority of respondents encountered some difficulties when looking for and accessing data about
companies from other Member States; only 20% respondents to the public consultation and 13% of
SMEs replying to the targeted consultation of SMEs did not encounter any difficulties at all. The
most often mentioned difficulty by respondents to the public consultation was that information
about companies in different Member States was not comparable (48%, 34 out of 71 respondents),
that stakeholders were not able to find/have access to it at EU level but only in national business
registers (35%, 25 out of 71), and language difficulties (34%, 24 out of 71). Business associations,
companies and legal professionals stressed in particular the lack of comparability and not having
access at EU level whereas public authorities most frequently mentioned language difficulties.
Similarly, for SMEs responding to the SME panel it was a problem that the information could be
only found on companies’ websites (19%) or only in business registers (12%)
33
. In addition, 15% of
SMEs could not find/access company information at all. Some stakeholders also mentioned during
consultation activities that it was sometimes challenging - even for legal professionals specialised in
company law - to identify the website of the official business register in other Member States as
there are many private websites also providing company information.
As to the type of information, the consultation activities identified the following gaps: (1)
lack of
information about other legal forms than limited liability companies; (2) lack of information about
place of management and place of the main economic activity; (3) lack of information about
company groups and ownership; (4) lack of information about third country branches at EU level;
(5) lack of connected EU level systems; (6) other difficulties.
28
Letterbox companies: overview of the phenomenon and existing measures Final Report,
Letterbox companies -
Publications Office of the EU (europa.eu).
29
Similar purposes are also found by
The International Business Registers Report 2019 (ebra.be).
30
See Communication “Identifying
and addressing barriers to the single market”
and Staff Working Document
“Business
Journey on the Single Market: Practical Obstacles and Barriers”.
31
SME Performance Review (europa.eu)
32
Business Survey - The state of the Single Market (eurochambres.eu),
incl. 1107 entrepreneurs from 27 EU countries.
33
Respondents could only choose one answer, therefore lower numbers of respondents per difficulty.
7
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0012.png
Lack of information about other legal forms than limited liability companies
The majority of consulted stakeholder groups across the consultation activities were in favour of
making information about other types of companies than limited liability companies available. In
particular, different stakeholder groups, including companies, agreed that information about
partnerships should be made available centrally at EU level through BRIS. For instance, 71% (48
out of 68) of respondents to the public consultation were in favour of having access to information
about other legal forms in general, and 36 out of those (including a number of business associations
and public authorities) were in favour of having access to information about partnerships.
So were
115 out of 117 of SMEs replying on this issue in the SME panel. 91% of legal practitioners, 90% of
public authorities, 72% of companies and 70% of business registers in the supporting study surveys
considered that having information on partnerships at EU level would be beneficial. Most Member
States’ representatives in the Commission’s expert group (CLEG) were in favour of transparency on
partnerships.
Partnerships play a significant role in many Member States and are economic operators on equal
footing with limited liability companies. In 2022, the number of partnerships registered in the EU
amounts to about 2 million
34
. Therefore, having good access to cross-border information about
partnerships is seen as important by stakeholders, as shown by replies to the consultations above,
and the lack of it means that e.g. companies and other stakeholders planning to cooperate or
cooperating cross-border with partnerships face difficulties to find information. The lack of
partnerships information can also have an impact on e.g. transparency on groups (as partnerships
appear in company group structures) or on tackling fraud and abuse.
In addition, it also limits the possibility to use such information to develop connected EU level
systems/administrations (see below e.g. EPREL or interconnection of BRIS with other systems)
which leads to unnecessary use of extra resources and duplication. In addition, insufficient cross-
border information about partnerships makes it more difficult to tackle their possible use for abusive
purposes. While private limited liability companies seem to be the most commonly used legal form
for (abusive) letterbox companies, partnerships can also play a role. For example, the Danske Bank
money-laundering scandal involved limited partnerships and limited liability partnerships
35
; a 2016
report from the Danish tax authorities estimated that between 2010 and 2014, 384 (7%) of limited
partnerships, which had foreign owners, could be used for illegal tax evasion abroad.
36
Lack of information about the place of management and place of the main economic activity
Limited liability companies amount to around 16 million companies
37
. The increasing need to have
access to information about them - whether for business or public purposes - corresponds to their
importance in the economy and was confirmed by the public consultation whereby 67% of
respondents were in favour of EU company law rules requiring
disclosure of additional
information about limited liability companies
in national business registers and via BRIS.
More specifically, the consultation activities confirmed the importance of and demand for
information about the
place of management and the place of the main economic activity.
For
instance, tax authorities responding to the supporting study surveys needed this information for the
identification and detection of fraud and tax evasion (95% of tax authorities in case of place of
management and 89% - in case of place of economic activity), and the responding legal
Commission own calculations – see annex 6.
https://danskebank.com/-/media/danske-bank-com/file-cloud/2018/9/report-on-the-non-resident-portfolio-at-danske-
banks-estonian-branch.pdf
36
https://www.ft.dk/samling/20151/almdel/SAU/bilag/165/1619506/index.htm
37
Commission own calculations – see annex 6.
34
35
8
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0013.png
practitioners - for taxation purposes (55% of legal practitioners use place of management and 73% -
place of economic activities). Legal practitioners also needed the place of economic activity for
social security purposes (55%). Different stakeholders expressed support to have this information at
EU level, e.g. 70% of respondents to the public consultation were in favour of disclosing the place
of management in business registers and through BRIS, and 67% - the place of the main economic
activity. A responding EU level SME association listed the place of management as one of their
four priorities regarding company information that should be made available at national and EU
level. SMEs responding to the SME panel were also strongly in favour, with 109 of 114 in favour of
as regards the place of management, and 112 out of 113 - as regards the place of economic activity.
Some Member States in the consultations pointed out that these concepts are not part of their legal
systems and that they would need to be defined.
The lack of cross-border access to such information can lead to an administrative burden for
companies to submit this information to authorities on a case-by-case basis when e.g. setting up a
company, for insolvency/restructuring, for tax or social security purposes (more than half of
companies responding to the supporting study survey had to provide information on place of
management and/or place of economic activity for those purposes). The work of authorities and
legal practitioners can also be cumbersome in this context. This was confirmed by the results of the
supporting study where authorities, legal practitioners and companies confirmed that having this
information available would reduce administrative burden (72% of all stakeholders, 95% of public
authorities in case of place of management, and 81% legal practitioners and 66% of companies in
case of place of management, and 73% of all stakeholders, 95% of public authorities, 72% legal
practitioners and 69% of companies in case of the place of the main economic activity)
38
.
Lack of information about groups of companies and ownership
Concerning information about ownership, and in particular about
groups of companies,
many
stakeholders (minority shareholders, potential investors, creditors, potential business partners,
authorities, employees) but also civil society’s associations and communities at large may have a
legitimate interest in knowing the structure of the group to which the company belongs. Many
stakeholders confirmed that they use and need information related to groups of companies. The
taxation and anti-money laundering purposes were often mentioned by public authorities (mostly in
charge of tax issues), legal practitioners and companies replying to the supporting study surveys
39
.
Legal professionals also needed the group information to verify company data of a business partner
of a company (70%), and companies also needed it to apply for funding.
The need for the information about groups can be explained by the fact that a group of companies is
a common structure for organising business to maximise the allocation of material or human
resources or corporate funds between networks of companies. The group structure may also impact
the financial credibility and solvency of subsidiaries. Groups often deploy their economic activity
beyond the country of their main headquarters, including by direct or indirect exporting, contract
manufacturing, alliance, licensing, franchising or investment (e.g. through cross-border branches,
cross-border subsidiaries, mergers and acquisitions). In 2020, 135,450 multinational enterprise
groups were operating in the EU/EFTA, employing over 42 million people; 75 % of those were
controlled by an EU (66 %) or an EFTA parent (9 %)
40
.
38
Regarding the place of management, 42% of respondents expected a burden reduction to a large/very large extent and
further 30% to some extent. Regarding the main place of economic activity, 47% of respondents expected a burden
reduction to a large/very large extent and another 26% - to some extent.
39
For instance, 94% public authorities needed it for taxation purposes and 50% - for anti-money laundering purposes;
and 80% legal professionals needed it for anti-money laundering purposes.
40
European statistical register on multinational enterprise groups.
9
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0014.png
The majority of stakeholders across consultation activities confirmed that it is important and
beneficial to have better access to company information related to groups of companies including at
EU level. 77% of respondents to the public consultation and 111 out of 113 SMEs responding to the
SME panel were in favour; an EU level SME association listed information related to groups among
their four priorities regarding company information that should be available not only at national but
also at cross-border level and stressed that this information is indeed difficult to access and
compare, which represents additional time and financial costs for SMEs. 76% of the respondents to
the supporting study surveys also thought that it would be beneficial if information about groups
were publicly available to the wider public in an easily accessible way and format in national
business registers and BRIS. This need was also confirmed during targeted interviews with legal
practitioners and was strongly supported by company law professors in ICLEG, who considered
that it is important for any company’s stakeholder to have access to information on the group’s
existence and structure. Some Member States considered that implementation of such requirements
might be challenging including because this information was not yet available in their national
business register.
The lack of cross-border access to information about groups of companies means e.g. that
companies and other stakeholders wanting to check if their business partner is part of the group face
difficulties to find information. SMEs and other companies face administrative burden when having
to provide group related information to authorities on a case-by-case basis for tax or anti-money
laundering purposes, or when applying for funding (around half of companies in the supporting
study surveys said they needed to provide group information for those purposes). For example,
SMEs often need to prove whether they are part of the group or an autonomous company when
applying for funding. The recent evaluation of the SME recommendation
41
found that to verify the
SME status, a company that is part of a group may need to include the data from the other
companies in the group and that the cost and complexity to verify such status increased for non-
autonomous companies, especially those with complex ownership structures and documentation in
other countries. In that context, stakeholders suggested that the SME definition could be applied
more efficiently i.e. by increasing digitalisation of SMEs and public administrations, and improving
access to company data including by further development of BRISs.
This was confirmed by results of the supporting study surveys where 78% of all respondents (82%
of legal practitioners, 82% of public authorities and 75% of companies) said that having the group
information at EU level would help to reduce administrative burden.
Lack of information about third country branches at EU level
While branches of EU limited liability companies are already available in BRIS, information about
third country company branches (i.e. branches of non-EU companies) is not. There was strong
support for making this information accessible through BRIS in the public consultation with 90%
responding participants in favour, and high support was expressed in the supporting study surveys
with 73% of all respondents (in particular, 94% of public authorities and 81% of legal practitioners)
confirming that having this information at EU level would be beneficial).
Lack of connected EU level systems
Another problem raised in the consultation activities is that public authorities, companies, legal
professionals and other stakeholders who need company data or company related data need to
search for them in different systems, such as BRIS or
the EU interconnection of beneficial
41
Register of Commission Documents - SWD(2021)279 (europa.eu).
10
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0015.png
ownership registers (BORIS)
42
,
due to the lack of connection between them.
Although the data is
interrelated, it can be found only separately in these systems. This is also demonstrated in
stakeholder views during the consultation activities, where a majority of respondents to the public
consultation (82%) were in favour of linking BRIS with the EU interconnection of beneficial
ownership registers and 67% of respondents to the supporting study surveys thought it useful. In the
discussions in CLEG, most Member State also experts have considered interconnection of BRIS
with other systems, such as BORIS, beneficial.
In addition, the development of connected EU level systems/administrations and drawing full
benefits from those is also hindered by the lack of data about other legal forms than limited liability
companies in BRIS, and so far limited use of the EUID, which is not yet used by all EU
interconnection systems (e.g. the insolvency registers interconnection system (IRI)
43
), is not
available for other legal forms (as explained below), and is not sufficiently used by registers and
authorities to unequivocally identify EU companies.
Example of use of BRIS and EUID (European Unique Identification Number)
44
The EUID is based on the national registration number and is available free of charge in BRIS. To
get registered in the European Product Registry for Energy Labelling (EPREL)
45
, companies need
to prove that they are established in the EU/EEA. Thanks to the use of the EUID in EPREL to
cross-check the company data through BRIS, companies do not have to provide separate evidence
that they are EU/EEA companies. However, as the EUID is currently available for limited liability
companies and their cross-border branches only, EPREL cannot use this system for other entities,
e.g. partnerships. Other cross-checks need to be used, which creates administrative burden for
companies and relevant EU authorities, and hinders once-only filing.
In addition, the fact that systems/administrations are not connected at the EU level may also
contribute to fraud and abuse given that fraudulent companies can take advantage of the fact that
authorities do not share the information between themselves.
Other difficulties
European e-Justice Portal – Beneficial ownership registers interconnection system (BORIS) (europa.eu)
European e-Justice Portal - Bankruptcy & insolvency registers - search for insolvent debtors in the EU
(europa.eu)
44
Limited liability companies must have the EUID according to the Codified Company Law Directive.
45
Regulation (EU) 2017/1369
setting a framework for energy labelling
and repealing Directive 2010/30/EU.
42
43
11
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0016.png
Practical obstacles may also make it difficult to effectively access company data on a cross-border
basis. Although the public consultation showed that many stakeholders are familiar with BRIS
(74% of respondents) and use it (67%), it revealed that public authorities and business associations
were more familiar with BRIS as compared to companies and EU citizens. Other consultation
activities (i.e. the supporting study surveys and the consultation of SMEs) showed that respondents
mainly used websites of companies or business registers to find information about companies from
other Member States. 8% of the respondents to the supporting study survey and 4% of SMEs
replying to the SME panel used BRIS to access cross-border company data.
The consultation activities also showed that search in BRIS could be improved; 83% of respondents
to the public consultation asked for more
search functionalities
centrally at EU level via BRIS (in
particular by legal form, registered office or country-by-country reports) and improved search for
company data through BRIS was seen as important by SMEs (94 out of 115). The limited search
functionality was also mentioned by 42% of respondents responding to the supporting study
surveys, and in particular by business registers and legal practitioners (61% and 70%).
In addition, another difficulty reported was the
need to pay fees to access information and
documents from business registers,
indicated by legal practitioners, business registers and public
authorities responding to the supporting study surveys. 73% of respondents to the public
consultation were in favour of having more company data available free of charge at EU level
through BRIS.
2.3.
Direct use of company data is hindered/not possible when setting up cross-border
subsidiaries and branches
Setting up subsidiaries or branches in other Member States or carrying out cross-border operations
with companies in other Member States are means for EU companies, including SMEs, to expand
their economic activities beyond the national borders. There are approximately half a million EU
subsidiaries (i.e. companies with a separate legal personality) belonging to ultimate owners located
in the EU
46
. In addition, there are around 70,000 EU subsidiaries that are controlled by ultimate
owners located outside the European Union
47
. Concerning branches (with no separate legal standing
from the main company), there are about 50 000 cross-border branches and 20 900 third-country
branches, against more than 4.3 million domestic branches in the EU.
48
The results of consultation activities also give an example of how many companies try to set up
cross-border subsidiaries or branches. 13% of SMEs (mainly private and public limited liability
companies) replying to the SME panel indicated they already had an establishment/place of
business in another Member State, 9% were planning to have one whereas 5% tried but gave up.
Similarly, 20% of companies responding to the supporting study survey had or were considering
setting up a subsidiary in another Member State.
When setting up cross-border subsidiaries or branches, companies still often face administrative
barriers, which create administrative burden and may even have a deterrent effect. In this context,
stakeholders representing companies, and in particular SMEs and start-ups, call for additional
measures, which would make it quicker and less costly to create a presence to explore markets in
other Member States
49
. The 2021 Single Market Strategy findings also stressed that despite
progress, the “European
SMEs experience legislation as complex and burdensome, especially due
to the different procedures in Member States. These barriers deter many from doing cross-border
46
47
Supporting study
Supporting study
48
Supporting study. These figures on branches should be taken with caution given the difficulties in data collection.
49
Meetings with SME organisations.
12
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0017.png
business and scaling-up”.
As to specific difficulties when setting up cross-border subsidiaries or branches, the consultation
activities show that in a big majority of Member States, companies need to resubmit data, which
exists in their national business registers, to the registers of other Member States. The main
difficulties mentioned by companies in the public consultation and by SMEs in the SME panel
included the need for certified translation of company documents and for legalisation/apostille of
these documents
50
. For instance, around half of SMEs with experience of setting up
subsidiaries/branches abroad mentioned the need for legalisation/apostille and certified/sworn
translation in the SME panel.
60% of those answering SMEs faced administrative costs or time consuming procedures linked to
such difficulties; and costs for legal advice (e.g. from lawyers or notaries), translations, legalisation
costs were mentioned by a few respondents in this context. The need for legalisation of documents
and certified translations when setting up branches for companies, and to a lesser extent
subsidiaries, was also mentioned by nearly half of the legal practitioners replying to the supporting
study surveys. The existence of costs for companies (time, legal cost and fees) in such cross-border
situations was also confirmed by the targeted interviews with practising lawyers. These
administrative barriers create a significant administrative burden (time, legal cost and fees) for
companies as shown by a concrete case below.
According to a lawyer interviewed in the context of targeted consultations
51
, to
obtain a
company extract about the parent company when establishing a subsidiary in another
Member State, the following steps need to be taken, resulting in the following costs:
1) Identification that the business register is the official one (and not just e.g. a commercial
database). This, including getting a company extract may require the involvement of a lawyer,
which might cost up to EUR 100 and, depending on whether a cooperation with a lawyer in that
Member State already exist or not, take time (up to 7 days).
2) Delivery of the company extract is free of charge in some Member States, but in others it is
against a fee.
3) Depending on the form of the extract, obtaining notarisation and/or apostille, which in practice
usually requires involving a lawyer, takes up to 7 days and costs up to EUR 300 (EUR 150 for
notarisation and apostille and EUR 150 for foreign lawyer’s assistance)
4) Sending the paper document: up to 3 days and cost of the courier fees of ca. EUR 30.
5) An official translation: depending on the size of the document, up to 3 days, cost ca. EUR 100.
This means that to get an official extract, which can be used in another Member State where
the subsidiary will be set up, may cost up to 530 EUR and take up to 17 days.
This experience was confirmed by other sources (other bilateral interviews and desk research)
52
. In
practice, this means that companies setting up a subsidiary or a branch in another Member State
cannot yet rely on the once-only principle. This is also reflected in the calls in the EU Start-up
Nations Standard
53
to make it possible to submit legal documents from other EU jurisdictions as
50
51
See Annex 2 with synopsis report on consultation activities for more detail.
Interview with a Polish lawyer.
52
Furthermore, different costs for cross-border use of company information, such as costs of company extract, cost of
legalisation/apostille, costs of certified translation were gathered through legal mapping of all Member States in the
supporting study (Annexes 6 and 7).
53
Startup Nations Standard.
13
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0018.png
proof for the incorporation of a start-up (or creation of a subsidiary of an existing start-up
expanding in the single market).
2.4.
Direct use of company information is hindered or not possible in all cross-border
activities and situations, including administrative and court procedures
Companies often need to provide information about their registered office, legal representatives,
their status, object of the company or its activity in the context of administrative procedures, e.g. to
obtain funding or for social security purposes, authorisations, public procurement, taxation, or in
court proceedings in another Member State. These requirements are based on different sectoral
requirements, which result in a situation where companies often have to provide similar information
for different purposes in a cross-border situation despite the fact that such information is already
available in their national business registers. Companies also often need to prove to the authorities
that they are an EU company, e.g. in the example about European Product Registry for Energy
Labelling (EPREL) explained above. However, based on sectoral EU legislation, it is sometimes not
clear what specific information a company needs to provide to prove this.
The consultation activities confirmed that companies face difficulties or find it impossible to use the
information, which is already in their national business register, also in other cross-border
situations, including when dealing with competent authorities or in court proceedings in another
Member State. This was the case for a majority (73%) of companies in the public consultation. The
company data in the business register of one Member State is often not accepted as evidence in
other Member State, probably due to the perceived risk of inaccuracy of the registered information
from another Member State; instead, they require additional evidence and extra formalities, which
generates costs and delays for the parties relying on the registered information
54
. Such further
conditions are imposed due to
lack of trust
in cross-border company data, even if company
documents and information from the business registers of other Member States are accepted among
EU Member States.
Similarly to setting up subsidiaries and branches cross-border, the main difficulties mentioned by
stakeholders in the public consultation and by SMEs in the SME panel also related to requirements
of certified translation of company documents and their legalisation/apostille. For instance, 33% of
SMEs with experience of setting up subsidiaries or branches abroad needed certified translations
and 22% - legal certification (apostille); and over half of SMEs involved in cross-border court
proceedings needed certified/sworn translation of company information/documents. Similarly,
more than half of legal practitioners and of public authorities responding to the surveys for the
supporting study needed certified or sworn translations of documents (64% and 53% respectively)
and 45% of practitioners and a third of authorities also mentioned the need for authentication
(apostille) in administrative and court procedures. Furthermore, 60% of the legal practitioners faced
difficulties dealing with company law procedures due to differences in electronic formats required
by authorities and courts, and 50% due to requirements from business registers.
These difficulties and requirements often lead to administrative burden, additional costs and delays
as shown in a concrete example below.
A lawyer interviewed in the context of targeted consultations
55
indicated the following main
problems/costs to access and use company information from business registers:
1)
Local access:
often not possible to access public information remotely,
54
ICLEG report on the use of company data (to be published on the Commission company law policy website and in
the Register of expert groups once finalised).
55
Interview with a Spanish lawyer.
14
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0019.png
2) Need for
translation
into the local language,
3)
Apostille,
4)
Delays
due to legal formalities,
5)
Legal costs
of approximately EUR1,000 / EUR 2,000,
6)
Internal costs for the managers
of the companies to manage it. Increased bureaucracy, and
7)
"Opportunity" cost
that discourages the closing of transactions or discourages the pursuit of
cross-border alternatives.
These difficulties may have an important impact on the transaction or can even have a deterrent
effect, in particular for SMEs, which have less resources and knowledge to handle formalities and
procedures and are often obliged to pay services providers or lawyers to handle those. It has been
estimated that where a big company spends one Euro per employee because of a regulatory duty, a
small business might have to spend on average up to ten Euros
56
. 64% of SMEs with experience of
setting up cross-border subsidiaries/branches responding to the SME panel faced administrative
costs or time consuming procedures when dealing with authorities in other Member States.
In addition, the company extracts, which confirm that the company is validly incorporated and
exists (i.e. an “identity card” for companies), vary between Member States and cannot be used in
cross-border situations without burdensome and costly formalities. As shown by targeted
consultations with legal professionals and also examples below, the procedures vary from one
Member State to another, or even within the Member State, and it is difficult or sometimes even
impossible at the beginning of a procedure to establish what documents are needed and with which
formalities, and whether a company extract will be accepted by public authorities in another
Member State, leading to legal uncertainty.
Examples of additional requirements imposed by courts or authorities
As regards the power of the director(s) to represent the company, for example,
German courts
often require a certificate by a German notary who accessed the register in another Member State
and attests that the information about the power of representation is correct. Where the legal value
of the foreign register does not correspond with that of the German register (at least from the court’s
point of view), because the foreign register does not verify the accuracy of the information, German
courts do not even accept this and require various other documents (varying from court to court).
The above-mentioned examples are based on judgments of the German courts, which mostly
concerned UK companies. They were cited in an academic paper
57
and according to an expert view,
the position of the courts would presumably be the same with respect to, for example, Irish or
Danish companies.
The
Supreme Court of Justice of Austria
(OGH) held in 2015 that if an Austrian notary gets an
excerpt from the Dutch companies register and certifies it, this document does not have the
evidentiary value of a public document. It can thus not be used to prove who can represent the
company for purposes of entry into the Austrian land register. The OGH reasoned that in case of
foreign registers, it can be difficult for the notary to check the plausibility of the register data due to
the different legal system and language. According to an Austrian practitioner, excerpts from
company registers of other EU Member States are usually accepted by the Austrian land register
‘Models to reduce the disproportionate regulatory burden on SMEs. Report of the Expert Group’, European
Commission, May 2007
57
ICLEG report on the use of company data.
56
15
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0020.png
and the Austrian companies register if there is a certified translation and an apostille. Sometimes the
registrar also requires a certified translation of the apostille.
58
The magnitude of costs due to obstacles when using company extracts cross-border could be high
because such extracts are very important for companies and legal professionals who rely on them to
confirm information about companies and identify them, and because they are frequently used for
many different purposes in cross-border situations. For instance, they are needed to obtain different
permits and certificates, to open a bank account for the company, to take part in public tenders, to
apply for funding, and in many other cross-border situations such as the conclusion of a cross-
border contract with clients and suppliers or the verification of company’s legal capacity before the
court of another Member State. The company extract is also required by EU law in certain
procedures
59
.
For example, a lawyer from Poland who took part in a workshop organised for the supporting study
mentioned that in case of any administrative or court proceedings in Poland (whether initiated by
the represented company, against it or including its participation in any other way), a standard set of
Power of Attorney (PoA) document and a company excerpt from the relevant register are both
necessary attachments to any filing. Power of Attorney (PoA) is needed to prove that a lawyer can
represent the company and the company extract is needed to prove that the person signing the PoA
is indeed registered in the business register as authorised representative of the company (e.g. board
member).
2.5.
What are the problem drivers?
2.5.1. Company data is not available in business registers and/or cross-border through
BRIS
Currently, EU company law lays down harmonised disclosure requirements, which regulate which
information companies need to disclose, i.e. make it publicly available through submitting such
information in the business register, and through BRIS. However, the Codified Company Law
Directive covers disclosure requirements only for limited liability companies, as listed in its Annex
II, and only the information that is listed in its Article 14 such as company name, legal form, the
instrument of constitution, registered office, authorised legal representatives or accounting
documents. Articles 18 and 19 stipulate which information is available through BRIS as well as
which information is available free of charge via BRIS.
This means that the disclosure of other company information is currently not required by EU
company law rules and is left to national laws; therefore, national business registers may store and
give access to more data on companies than is required by EU company law. This includes, for
instance, information on legal forms other than limited liability ones (including e.g. partnerships).
For instance,
partnerships
are registered in business registers in all Member States, yet there are
some differences between the types of partnerships and types of information made available about
them across the EU.
60
Also, even if this data is available in national registers, it is not available at
EU level through BRIS and it is thus more difficult and burdensome to access the information on
those companies cross-border.
58
59
ICLEG report on the use of company data.
E.g. Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/1224 on the EU Schengen Area Entry/Exit System (EES), Art.
10, paragraph 6.
60
See Annex 12.
16
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0021.png
Some other information on companies that is important for stakeholders, e.g.
on groups of
companies and ownership,
is only available in some business registers and it may be dispersed in
different documents or databases, not publicly available or not available at all. The supporting study
found that 24% of the responding business registers have information about the structure of the
group and EU parent company and 19% about the third country parent company as well as
information on the ownership rights between the members of the group.
61
In some other Member States, there are only indirect means of disclosure of the group’s affiliation,
for example through identification of controlling shareholders, including e.g. IT, AT, DE or PL.
This information is disclosed in the national business registers but only for private limited liability
companies (although in IT, the identity of the shareholders of a public company is also disclosed
together with the financial report on an annual basis).
62
However, it requires burdensome “upstream
research” of the entire shareholding chain in order to find who the ultimate parent of a particular
subsidiary is, and this research might not provide information on intermediate parent companies
registered abroad
63
.
In EU company law, the single-member company Directive
64
requires that single members are
disclosed in the business register or entered in a register kept by the company and accessible to the
public. Other EU law provides certain rules on the information related to the groups of companies.
Pursuant to the Accounting Directive
65
, the parent company established in the EU and preparing
consolidated accounts must include all the group member companies in the notes to the
consolidated accounts
66
. However, this provides a “list” of subsidiaries rather than complete
information on the structure of the group and focuses on companies preparing consolidated
accounts. These rules are subject to national exemptions, as a result of which for instance in Spain,
only around 1000 companies provide consolidated accounts
67
. In addition, larger companies have to
disclose in the explanatory notes to their individual financial statements the name and registered
office of the ultimate parent company
68
drawing up consolidated financial statements and the next
upper intermediate parent
69
. As regards subsidiaries, the disclosure obligation does not apply to
subsidiaries that are small companies, unless a Member State went beyond the EU requirements
70
.
Yet other EU disclosure requirements may apply only to certain members of the group (e.g. listed
companies) and not for the whole group
71
. In other cases, disclosure requirements related to group
related information might be for specific purposes and therefore not allowing an overview of the
group. For instance, the AML Directive requires public disclosure about beneficial owners (natural
person(s) as ultimate owners) of legal entities
72
.
Some other company information might be even more difficult to find because it might not be
available in national business registers. For instance, this is the case for information about the
61
62
Supporting study.
ICLEG report on transparency.
63
ICLEG report on transparency.
64
Directive 2009/102/EC.
65
Directive 2013/34/EU
.
66
Article 28 (2) of Directive 2013/34/EU.
67
ICLEG report on transparency.
68
Article 17(1)(l) of Directive 2013/34/EU.
69
Article 17(1)(m) of Directive 2013/34/EU.
70
As allowed by Article 16(2) of Directive 2013/34/EU.
71
For example, in EU capital markets rules, listed companies have a duty to disclose a) the crossing of pre-determined
percentages as regards voting rights held by their own shareholders (Directive 2004/109/EC), b) a duty on issuers to
identify their controlling shareholders (Regulation (EU) 2017/1129) or c) a duty to include in the annual report
additional information on shares with special control rights (Directive 2004/25/EC).
72
ICLEG report on transparency.
17
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0022.png
effective place of management of companies,
head office, principal place of business, central
administration, the location where the most important decisions are taken by the company’s
management,
the location where the main economic activities of the company take place
or
similar concepts. In the supporting study out of 22, seven Member States indicated that they record
information on both the place of effective management and the place of the main economic
activities.
As regards the information on the effective place of management of companies, some Member
States which have this information in the register are those, which require a “real seat” of the
company in their territory as a condition for establishment there.
2.5.2. Limited functionalities in BRIS (e.g. search criteria, no interconnection with other
EU interconnection systems)
BRIS is currently not connected to other interconnection systems relating to company-relevant
information. The interconnection of all insolvency registers (IRI)
73
was established in 2021
following Regulation (EU) 2015/848 and is accessible on the European e-Justice portal. The
beneficial ownership registers interconnection system (BORIS)
74
became operational in 2021 on the
basis of Directive (EU) 2015/849 as amended by Directive (EU) 2018/843. The BORIS
interconnection uses the same technology and technical infrastructure created for BRIS (i.e. the
"European central platform"). All these interconnections have different lifespans and have been
developed separately, although all are accessible on the European e-Justice portal and two of them
(BRIS and BORIS) use the same infrastructure and technology.
The functioning of BRIS is based on the EUID, which every limited liability company has. The
EUID also links these companies and their cross-border branches. The EUID is free of charge and
builds on national registration company and contains the following elements: a) country code, b)
business register identifier and c) company’s registration number. It is also compliant with ISO
6523. However, the EUID in BRIS is currently available only to limited liability companies and
their cross-border branches and, with the exception of BORIS, it is currently not used to link
company information stored in different registers
75
.
Finally, the harmonised criteria for the BRIS search service provided on the European e-Justice
Portal were established by the Commission Implementing Regulation 2021/1042
76
. It allows the
search via BRIS by company name and registration number. This is based on the information
disclosed and available through BRIS in accordance with the Codified Company Law Directive.
However, the need for increased and more sophisticated search criteria goes hand in hand with the
increasing need for more company information.
2.5.3. Different intensity and procedures in Member States to verify the correctness of
company information before it is entered in business registers
Currently, EU company law lays down limited harmonised obligations to verify how company data
should be checked before it is entered into business registers. Article 10 of the 1968 First Council
Directive
77
(
now Article 10 of the Codified Directive) requires Member States to provide for either
i) preventive administrative or judicial control at the time of the formation of the company; or ii) for
the instrument of constitution, the company statutes and any amendments to those documents to be
73
74
European e-Justice Portal - Bankruptcy & insolvency registers - search for insolvent debtors in the EU (europa.eu)
European e-Justice Portal – Beneficial ownership registers interconnection system (BORIS) (europa.eu)
75
For an example of the use of EUID for other authorities, see example on EPREL above.
76
EUR-Lex - 32021R1042 - EN - EUR-Lex (europa.eu)
77
First Council Directive 68/151/EEC.
18
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0023.png
drawn up and certified in due legal form. However, it leaves it to the Member States to specify the
items to be checked, the intensity of the checks and other details of the process. This was due to
differences between the standards of Member States at the time of the adoption of this provision in
1968
78
. More recently, Directive (EU) 2019/1151 introduced minimum harmonisation for ex-ante
checks (e.g. checking the identity of the natural person) applicable to fully online
formation/registration of certain companies (private limited liability companies) and to the fully on-
line filing of documents to the business register by all limited liability companies
79
. They were
introduced primarily to provide safeguards against any abusive/fraudulent use of online procedures
and not specifically to ensure realiability of data; they only apply to on-line procedures while for
any offline procedures and for formation/registration of other company types, there are no
mandatory EU rules.
As to national rules in place, all Member States carry out, to a certain extent, an ex-ante scrutiny of
company documents and information, i.e. check or verify those, before they are entered in the
business register. However, there are different approaches in Member States based on their legal
traditions. The differences relate to the intensity of checks, procedures or also to the person/body in
charge of verifying the information (e.g. notaries or lawyers together with the business register or
only the business register).
80
2.5.4. Company data originating from other Member States’ business registers is not
recognised cross-border and subject to formalities
The acceptance of company documents or information from other Member States’ registers by
authorities or courts is usually subject to some conditions. Most national authorities or courts
require an apostille to accept company documents/information from other Member States’ business
register as valid for administrative procedures or court proceedings in their country. Apostille is a
certificate issued by a competent authority which proves the authenticity of the document, and
which is then recognised by all countries party to the
Hague Convention (Apostille Convention)
81
.
All Member States are party to this Convention and it applies to public documents, including
administrative ones, which, in turn, include extracts from business registers
82
. Eight Member States
(AT, BE, BG, DK, EE, ES, LV, and SI) have implemented apostilles in electronic format
83
. In a
limited number of countries, there are bilateral agreements, which simplify this procedure.
However, it seems that many of these agreements are restricted to civil status documents. The scope
of these agreements may also vary and there is a certain degree of uncertainty as to whether or not
they apply to documents from other Member States’ business registers. In addition, all
documents/information from business registers are not treated in the same way. While an extract
from a foreign business register would be considered as a foreign public document, other
information not in the form of an official document would be treated as private documents.
84
This
means that in practice, the situation is not clear and the conditions for acceptance of documents and
the requirements to have apostille vary depending on circumstances and purposes across Member
78
The approaches varied e.g. between DE, which required both judicial control and notarisation of the statutes, IT
where judicial control was needed or BE and LU which called for notarisation of the statutes only.
79
Articles 13g and 13j
of
Directive (EU) 2019/1151.
80
More detailed information will be presented in tables in Annex 12.
81
Convention of 5 October 1961 Abolishing the Requirement of Legalisation for Foreign Public Documents (the
Apostille Convention),
82
The Hague Conference on Private International Law, Permanent Bureau,
Apostille Handbook, A Handbook on the
Practical Operation of the Apostille Convention, 2013.
83
See the
Implementation Chart of the e-apostille.
84
Supporting study.
19
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0024.png
States
85
. The legal uncertainty created by unclear and varying rules and practices is confirmed by
targeted consultations. While the Public Documents
Regulation
86
removed
unnecessary formalities
(apostille) for citizens, companies in cross-border situations continue to face the legal uncertainty
and administrative burden.
Meeting this requirement can be costly and costs for apostille vary across Member States, as shown
in the table in Annex 8. Applying for an apostille can also cause additional costs in terms of time. In
addition to legalisation/apostille requirements, documents or information must also be typically
translated into the language of the relevant Member States by certified translators.
According to a law firm interviewed as part of the targeted consultations, it took almost
two
months
to obtain the information to conclude a cross-border acquisition of a Spanish company
by a French company, mainly because of the delay in
obtaining the apostille
for the
information received from the business register.
For instance, for the documents from another Member State’s business register to be recognised
as legal evidence for legal proceedings in a Spanish court, the formal authenticity of the
documents needs to be confirmed (e.g. by apostille), they need to be translated into Spanish
87
.
As regards requirements when a (parent) company sets up branches or subsidiaries in other Member
States, the business register or the body/person in charge in that country requests information about
the parent company in addition to information about branch or subsidiary. For example, for the
setting up a cross-border branch, all Member States (except DK) require additional
documents/information compared to those required for setting up domestic branches. This includes
information relating to the foreign (parent) company e.g. its name, legal form, amount of the
subscribed capital, information on its corporate status, annual financial statements, proof of the
registration of the foreign company in the relevant business register or copy of the instrument of
incorporation
88
. Although this information already exists in the business register of the parent
company, the companies are still often required to re-submit it with formalities, including
translation and legalisation/apostille. Similar rules apply when setting up cross-border subsidiaries.
Only a few Member States (e.g. BG, EL, LT and LV) retrieve the documents required for the
registration of branches of foreign companies directly from other business registers. Some others
responded to the surveys for the supporting study that their national rules did not provide for a
direct retrieval of information from other Member State business registers, or that the technical
means for a direct retrieval of data from other business registers was lacking, or that all information
necessary to set up a branch in some Member States was not available through BRIS
89
.
2.5.5. Divergent company extracts
Business registers in most Member States issue company extracts. The aim of these documents is to
provide in one document basic or more detailed company data that is available in the business
register at the moment when the extract is generated by the register. However, currently there are
85
86
Supporting study.
Regulation (EU) 2016/1191
amending Regulation (EU) No 1024/2012
87
Article 323.2º of Civil Procedure Law regarding legalisation; Article 144 of the Civil Procedure Law regarding the
translation; and Article 323.1 of the Civil Procedure Law regarding the formalities in the other Member State. For
consolidated jurisprudence in Spain on this issue, see e.g. Resolution of Supreme Court of Spain of 21/11/2016.
88
Supporting study
89
Supporting study.
20
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0025.png
different practices across Member States with regard to the structure and content, length, cost of
company extracts and regarding languages in which they are issued
90
.
2.6.
How likely is the problem to persist?
If no additional EU action is taken in this area, overall, there will continue to be
limited
transparency and limited availability of reliable company data in business registers and at EU
level (through BRIS)
about 16 million limited liability companies and about around 2 million
partnerships. Furthermore,
barriers to direct use of company data in cross-border situations
will continue to exist, including insufficent use of the once-only principle
and therefore, double
requirements for companies when setting up cross-border subsidiaries or branches.
At the same time, users’ needs will be likely to evolve. In line with digital developments, the
interest in company data is increasing and stakeholders will continue to be more and more
interested in easy access to reliable/official company data for different purposes. In response,
Member States are already making efforts and will most likely continue to improve (and digitalise)
company law procedures and access to company data at national or regional level, as well to
connect companies and different authorities or connect different authorities. The Nordic Smart
Government (NSG) project run by the Nordic trade registers, which aims to enhance the automation
and use of financial data between companies and from companies to the authorities
91
, or the
cooperation between the Estonian and the Finnish registers to simplifiy cross-border data
exchange
92
, are examples of such regional developments. However, without EU level action, such
national or regional developments would not be able to create a reliable and trustworthy business
environment and remove barriers to the use of company data when setting up cross-border
subsidiaries and branches and in other cross-border situations, including administrative procedures
and court proceedings. In certain regions, as a result, companies would be in a more preferential
situation than in others.
The reforms in the third countries close to the EU would also be likely to continue and have an
impact on developments in the EU. For instance, the United Kingdom is about to perform a major
reform of its business register as it is considered to be a key element of the information architecture
of the UK economy and estimated that to be worth £1-3 billion to its users. The reform is meant to
respond to current challenges and in particular to concerns about the accuracy of the companies’
register as well as to enable the register to play a greater role in tackling economic crime and
fraud
93
.
The commercial service providers would also continue to sell company data online against
substantial fees, however, they would not be able to provide up-to-date company data for official
use, on which third parties can rely and which is required by public authorities and which can be
obtained from business registers and through BRIS. In addition, other types of commercial service
providers such as those offering services to obtain company extracts from business registers,
including apostille and translations, would continue to emerge. This could aggrevate the difficulties
to identify the official source of company data on-line.
90
91
More detailed information is presented in tables in the Annex.
Nordic Smart Government
(Denmark, Finland, Sweden, Iceland and Norway).
92
Commercial registers of Estonia, Finland sign agreement on data exchange :: The Baltic Course | Baltic States news
& analytics (baltic-course.com).
93
Corporate Transparency and Register Reform White Paper (publishing.service.gov.uk).
21
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
New targeted initiatives or sectoral legislation might be also put forward at national or EU level,
with an aim to fill in this gap in company information, requiring companies to submit information
for their purposes, and possibly creating new EU databases or EU level registries. This would likely
result in multiple and overlapping reporting requirements and thus increased administrative burden
for companies given that company registration is a national, EU and international level legal
obligation and the other initiatives would not be able to replace it but would in practice only add to
it. Any new databases or registries would also require public funding both at national and EU level,
leading to unnecessary additional expenses at both levels, given that business registers and BRIS
already exist and can be extended.
In general, the work towards providing key public services online for European citizens and
businesses and creating connected public administrations, including through the use of the once-
only principle, would be ongoing following the Communication 2030 Digital Compass, towards the
target of 100% of key public services being available online for European citizens and businesses
by 2030. However, while Member States would continue to work towards that target at national
level, without a targeted EU initiative, these objectives could not be achieved for cross-border
procedures between companies and public authorities (in particular business registers), which rely
on the use of the official company data in business registers. These would continue to be hindered
by burdensome formalities. Similarly, solely actions at the national level would not be sufficient to
apply the once-only principle for setting up of cross-border branches and subsidiaries.
3.
W
HY SHOULD THE
EU A
CT
?
3.1.
Legal basis
This initiative aims to enhance transparency in the Single Market by increasing the amount and
improving the reliability of company information available in national business registers and at EU
level (i.e. cross-border through BRIS) and thus complement the existing harmonised disclosure
requirements enshrined in the Codified Company Law Directive. In addition, this initiative aims to
ensure legal certainty and lift barriers to the use of company information in cross-border situations,
including administrative procedures and court proceedings, and when setting up cross-border
subsidiaries and branches, and thus enhancing and facilitating the freedom of establishment by
companies. For these objectives to be achieved, in line with the Codified Company Law Directive,
the appropriate legal basis for the initiative is Article 50 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the
European Union (TFEU), in particular articles 50(2) (b) (close cooperation between the competent
authorities in the Member States), 50(2) (c) (abolition of administrative procedures and practices
forming and obstacle to freedom of establishment), 50(2) (f) (progressive abolition of restrictions on
freedom of establishment) and 50(2) (g) (coordination measures concerning the protection of
interests of companies’ members and other stakeholders) should be envisaged. In addition, Article
114 of TFEU could possibly be added.
3.2.
Subsidiarity: Necessity of EU action
As the problems described earlier show, the current situation is mainly caused by divergent national
rules and lack of appropriate rules at EU level. First, to increase the scope of available company
data at EU level through BRIS, a coordinated action is required to ensure that all Member States
have the data in their business registers and that the data is accessible comparable and multilingual
format centrally at EU level through BRIS. Similarly, co-ordinated action is required to ensure that
there are common checks of company data before it is entered into a national business registers to
improve its reliability and facilitate its use in a cross-border situations. Finally, to enable the cross-
22
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0027.png
border use of company data including the application of the once-only principle requires the
elimination of barriers.
Therefore, Member States acting individually could not satisfactorily remove the barriers because
rules and procedures would need to be compatible and coherent in order to work in cross-border
situations. A coherent legal framework for cross-border transparency and availability of company
data, and for cross-border use of company data can be achieved exclusively at EU level.
3.3.
Subsidiarity: Added value of EU action
There is a strong value added of action at EU level in the context of this initiative because it focuses
on cross-border issues. Improving the availability and reliability of comparable and multilingual
company data at EU level and cross-border is an objective that needs to be achieved at EU level. In
addition, EU action is needed because this initiative aims to build on BRIS, which is an already
operational EU level system of interconnection and provides for multilingual and comparative
company information cross-border. Similarly, the value added from linking the EU level systems of
interconnection of registers can also be only achieved by an EU action. Common rules are also
required to ensure that similar checks of company data are carried out before it enters business
registers and only those can result in increased legal certainty about company data for companies,
authorities and other stakeholders in the Single Market. The objective of enabling direct use of
company data from business registers in cross-border situations equally requires action at EU level
to introduce the once-only principle or provide for a common company extract that would be
recognisable in all Member States. In line with the principle of proportionality, the planned
initiative will not go beyond what is necessary to achieve its objectives by targeting specific cross-
border issues (i.e. needs of direct users to access and use cross-border official company data from
business registers) which could not be achieved by Member States on their own.
4.
O
BJECTIVES
: W
HAT IS TO BE ACHIEVED
?
The general and specific objectives of this initiative are presented in the following figure.
Objectives
4.1.
General objectives
In order to respond to the problems identified, the overarching aim of the planned initiative is to
contribute to the creation of a more integrated and digitalised Single Market by creating more
23
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0028.png
reliable legal framework that provides legal certainty for companies and other stakeholders while
contributing to the fight against abuse. The objective is to enhance transparency about companies in
the Single Market, through the use of digital tools (such as BRIS), to create trust between Member
States, while at the same time reducing overall administrative burden for companies and other
stakeholders in cross-border situations. The aim of the initiative is also to enhance cross-border
cooperation in particular between business registers (more connected public authorities) in the
Single Market and at the same time, to make it easier for SMEs to expand cross-border.
In addition, by building on the “first hand” information about companies in business registers and
their interconnection at EU level, the planned initiative would encourage more authorities (e.g. tax
authorities) to use the company data directly from the business registers and BRIS and thus reduce
the burden on companies by extending - de facto - the application of once-only principle (i.e.
companies would not need to submit the information to authorities because authorities would access
directly the information in the business registers). The initiative would also lay down the
foundations for more connected public administrations cross-border in the Single Market by making
it possible to connect other EU level systems/registers to BRIS.
This would contribute to complementing the Single Market, in particular for digital as called by the
European Council conclusions of 24-25 March 2022.
4.2.
Specific objectives
To address the problem drivers, the planned initiative aims to meet the specific objectives as
explained below.
4.2.1. Increasing the amount and improving the reliability of company data available in
business registers and/or BRIS
The first objective is to make more information about EU companies available in business registers
and in particular in BRIS. The consultation activities for this IA showed demand for more company
data, with 87% of respondents to the public consultation in favour of more harmonised company
information being made available on a cross-border basis (through BRIS), with majorities in favour
across stakeholder groups
94
. The planned interventions would seek to do this by building on the
company information, which is available in the national business registers and making it available
at EU level in BRIS. In addition, based on stakeholder needs, the initiative would seek to provide
access to more information both in national business registers and BRIS. However, having more
information available alone would not meet the objective sought. All the stakeholders, authorities
and public at large need to be able to trust that the information about companies is accurate, up-to-
date and trustworthy so that they can rely on it for their business purposes or in administrative or
court procedures. Therefore, the initiative also seeks to ensure that company data, which is entered
into business registers and which is also accessible through BRIS, is accurate, up-to-date and
trustworthy. Finally, in order to further enhance the access to company data, the initiative seeks to
improve the ways of searching for company information in BRIS and to find synergies between
BRIS and other EU level register interconnection systems, which contain company information.
94
All responding companies and legal professions, 93% of public authorities, 81% of EU citizens and 68% of business
associations were in favour.
24
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0029.png
4.2.2. Enabling direct use of company data available in business registers when setting
up cross-border branches/subsidiaries and in other cross-border activities and
situations
The second objective is to enable the use of the company information available in business registers
and in BRIS in cross-border situations. In consultation activities stakeholders in general confirmed
the existence of obstacles to cross-border use of company data and were overall supportive of
introducing measures to help companies when setting up subsidiaries/branches or in contacts with
authorities/courts in other Member States. First prerequisite for this is that company data in business
registers is reliable, which is addressed under the first objective. This also shows the interlinkages
between different problem drivers as well as between the objectives. The second prerequisite for the
cross-border use of company data is that its use is not hampered by costly and time-consuming
formalities creating administrative burden, complicating and slowing down procedures. Therefore,
the planned initiative aims to address the administrative barriers and formalities as well as the
diversity of national company extracts, which EU companies need use when operating cross-border.
Finally, concerning setting up of cross border subsidiaries and branches, the initiative aims to
ensure that the company doing such cross-border expansion would not need to file information,
which already exist in its own business register, twice or more and thus could rely on the
application of the once-only principle.
5.
W
HAT ARE THE AVAILABLE POLICY OPTIONS
?
5.1.
What is the baseline from which options are assessed?
In the absence of any EU action, the BRIS could not provide access to any new information beyond
what is regulated by Articles 14 and 19 of the Codified Company Law Directive. Information on
other types of companies would remain available only in the national business registers, while other
information (such as on groups) would continue to be only sporadically available. Stakehdolers
would need to access each national business register separately to find such information (in case it
exists) in other Member States, including the associated difficulties to compare such data as well as
the language barriers. This would mean that all stakeholders, be it companies, investors, creditors,
legal professionals, authorities or the public in general would neither have access to additional
comparable official information at EU level about 16 million limited liability companies in the EU
nor to information about around 2 million partnerships.
The implementation of the Anti-Money Laundering Directive
95
improves transparency by making
information about beneficial owners of legal entities and arrangements publicly available, but it
does not provide access to any other information about corporate entities. In addition, not taking
further action to increase transparency about companies at EU level could mean that certain
company types, on which there is less transparency, could be used for fraudulent/abusive purposes.
As regards ex-ante verification of company data, some progress would be achieved through the
implementation of the 2019 Company Law Digitalisation Directive which introduced some basic
ex-ante checks (e.g. checking the identity of the natural person) before the company (mainly private
limited liability company) is registered fully on-line or when the company files fully on-line new
information into the business register. However, the primary aim of those checks is to provide
safeguards against any abusive/fraudulent use of online procedures and they are limited to online
procedures. Thus, in general, the reliability of company data cross-border would continue to create
a problem for the cross-border use of such data.
95
Directive (EU) 2015/849 as amended by Directive (EU) 2018/843.
25
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0030.png
The possibility to use company data in cross-border situations would continue to be hindered by
costly formalities or sometimes even be impossible. As to the SMEs, which represent 98-99% of
limited liability companies in the EU, these problems could affect around 40% of SMEs
96
, as those
are engaged in cross-border activities. It would be unlikely that without any targeted EU
intervention the use of the once-only principle (no double submisson of the same information) when
a company sets up cross-border subsidiary or branch would be implemented. Every year, this would
concern around 4,000 new cross-border subsidiaries and 4,500 new cross-border branches. In
addition, no comprehensive simplification in formal requirements could be expected in cross-border
situations. Even if Member States would introduce some changes e.g. digitalise company extracts,
they would continue to be divergent, and not recognised across the Single Market without
translation and further formal requirements (apostille). Thus, companies would continue to face
costly and lengthy procedures due to double submission requirements. This would not only concern
those who set up cross-border subsidiaries or branches but all EU companies which engage in cross-
border activities, be it cross-border trade, services, investment, public procurement, and take part in
administrative procedures in that context, or which are parties to court proceedings.
Other specific EU level initiatives could continue to apply, e.g. the European Single Access Point
(ESAP)
97
initiative, once agreed upon by the co-legislator. It would facilitate access mainly to entity
and product related financial market information for investors, with the purpose of serving financial
market needs. It would not include any mechanism for cross-border cooperation and exchange of
company data. Also, the Single Digital Gateway would continue to apply, but it does not cover
business registers, company procedures and use of company data in cross-border administrative
procedures. These and some other related initiatives are described in Annex 9.
As a result, in the baseline scenario costs would remain significant for users. Limited transparency
would maintain higher costs for accessing cross-border company data and companies and other
stakeholders would continue to be hindered and face costs when trying to use cross-border company
data in administrative procedures or court proceedings or when trying to expand their business
activities through subsdiaries or branches cross-border. This would lead to missed opportunities for
companies in the Single Market.
5.2.
Description of the policy options
This section describes policy options which address the drivers described in section 2.2 above. They
aim to i) make more company data available in business registers and accessible cross-border
through BRIS, ii) interconnect BRIS with other systems and enable better searches, iii) to make
such company data in business registers and BRIS more reliable and iv) enable the cross-border use
of company data from business registers in cross-border situations. The preferred option will be
presented as a package of measures.
All the policy options presented in this section are based on legislative measures. This is because
this initiative builds on the existing EU company law. The Codified Company Law Directive
regulates company information available in business registers and through BRIS and the related
implementing acts ensure the uniform technical implementation of these legal obligations (e.g.
comparability of data in BRIS and interoperability). Finally, the described drivers, which the policy
96
IA on public documents. Other sources showed similar data, e.g. more than one third of SMEs (36%) imported from
another country within the EU, while 30% exported to another EU country, according to the 2015 Eurobarometer 421
on internationalisation of SMEs (fl_421_sum_en.pdf). According to the 2018 report on “SMEs growing beyond
borders”, the proportion of exporting SMEs varies somewhat across the various databases, ranging from 42% to 54%
(SME
Performance Review (europa.eu)).
97
Proposal for a Regulation establishing a European single access point providing centralised access to publicly
available information of relevance to financial services, capital markets and sustainability (COM/2021/723 final)
26
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0031.png
options aim to address, are all of legal nature and it would be only possible to address them through
legal action.
The following tables summarise the baseline scenario and how the different policy options can
address the different drivers. The overall intervention logic, which shows how policy options
address the drivers (i.e. causes of the problems) in order to meet the specific and the general
objectives is included in Annex 5.
5.2.1. Policy options 1 to make more company information available in business
registers and/or BRIS
In order to contribute to the specific objective 1, namely to increase the amount of company data
available in business registers and/or BRIS, a number of options are considered. The policy options
consist of different clusters of company data, which vary in terms of whether data is already
available in business registers or not as well as in terms of scope i.e. number of companies covered.
The policy options are not based on a specific threshold (certain turnover, number of employees)
because to address stakeholders’ needs and to increase transparency in the market, it is not possible
to differentiate companies according to thresholds. Therefore, the policy options include the entire
clusters.
Under
option 1a,
information about other types of companies than limited liability ones, i.e.
partnerships, would be also made available through BRIS
98
. This would apply to around 2 million
partnerships in the EU
99
. Today, this information is already filed in national business registers but it
is not covered by EU rules. Therefore, this option would introduce certain harmonised disclosure
requirements for partnerships at EU level to ensure that these entities file the same basic
information in business registers regardless of the Member State where they are registered. The
harmonised requirements would build on the example of the existing EU disclosure requirements
98
Article 16(6) of Directive 2017/1132 lays down requirement that documents and information submitted is stored by
the registers in a machine-readable and searchable format or as structured data (by 1 August 2023). BRIS requires
Member States to exchange specific information as structured data since 2017.
99
See annex 6.
27
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0032.png
for limited liability companies
100
but would be adjusted for partnerships on the basis of their
characteristics and taking into account the existing national disclosure requirements for these
entities. In addition, while EU Company Law already requires that third country company branches
are disclosed in national business registers, this option would make information about them
available in BRIS
101
.. In line with the current Article 19 of the Codified Company Law Directive,
this option would make certain information in BRIS accessible free of charge, while for others
Member States could require payment of fees in BRIS.
Under
option 1b,
in addition to information about partnerships and third country company
branches, the information related to cross-border group structures, which is only available in a few
business registers
102
would also be made available in all the business registers and via BRIS. There
are around 135.000 cross-border groups of companies in the EU
103
. This option would thus apply to
around 2 million partnerships as well as to around 135,000 cross-border groups. It would consist of
harmonised requirements for companies to disclose some group-related information, e.g. in terms of
how the group is formed but not covering information related to intra-group transactions or other
activity of economic nature between the members of the group. The disclosure requirements would
not aim to harmonise the concept of a “group” but would rather follow a similar approach to the
current disclosure requirements which do not include any substantive harmonisation, and it would,
to the extent possible, build on the concepts already included in the EU acquis
104
. The company
heading the group would also be required to provide an easy and user-friendly
description/visualisation of the group structure to their national business register
105
. This
information would allow to have a comprehensive overview of a group in one place. In addition to
the above, information about the single member (i.e. ownership) for the single-member limited
liability companies which the EU company law rules already require to be disclosed in the business
register or in a public register kept by the company
106
, would be made available via BRIS. Single-
member companies are also often used in group structures
107
.
Under
option 1c,
information related to their place of management and the place of the main
economic activity of limited liability companies, which is only available in a few business
registers
108
, would also be made available in all the business registers and via BRIS. Therefore, this
option would apply to around 2 million partnerships, around 135,000 cross-border groups and to
around 16 million limited liability companies. Similarly as for groups, this option would involve
introducing new disclosure requirements at EU level, as this information is currently most often not
required or disclosed by business registers, and this option would also not aim to harmonise these
concepts at EU level
109
.
In addition, a few stakeholders suggested that BRIS should give access to all information available
in national business registers. However, given the way BRIS is technically constructed including as
regards the data comparability and interoperability, this is not a technically feasible option.
100
101
Articles 14 and 19 of Directive 2017/1132.
There are no estimations available about number of third country branches in the EU.
102
See Annex 12 for more information.
103
Structure of multinational enterprise groups in the EU - Statistics Explained (europa.eu).
104
Building on e.g. the concepts in the Directive 2013/34/EU (Accounting Directive)
105
E.g. building in the Accounting Directive in terms of frequency of reporting. This structure could also contain
information about other legal entities, other than limited liability companies, e.g. foundations, if these are also part of
the group.
106
Directive 89/ 667/EEC
107
E.g. in case another legal person is the sole member of the company.
108
See Annex 12 for more information.
109
It would follow a similar approach to the current disclosure requirements, which do not include any substantive
harmonisation.
28
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0033.png
5.2.2. Policy options 2 to interconnect BRIS with other systems and enable better
searches
As an additional element to increase transparency, facilitate access to company information and
thus further contribute to the specific objective 1, policy options 2 would aim to
link BRIS with
other EU level systems of interconnection of registers.
The policy options differ in terms of
scope i.e. which companies would be covered by the interconnection and search facilities as well as
in terms of technical features and functions.
Under
option 2a,
BRIS would be interconnected at EU level with the EU Beneficial Ownership
Registers interconnection system (BORIS), which uses the same technology and technical
infrastructure created for BRIS (i.e. the "European central platform"). The European unique
company identifier (EUID), which limited liability companies and their cross-border branches have
according to EU company law rules
110
and which partnerships covered under options 1 would also
have and which BORIS also requires
111
would be used to link the information available about a
particular company in both registers. In practice, this would mean that when searching for
information about a particular company in BRIS, apart from information available through that
system, one would be also able to find the information accessible through BORIS on the beneficial
owner(s) of that company available for public access (and vice versa). This would mean being able
to search about 16 million limited liabilities and their cross-border branches as well as 2 million
partnerships at once. This would be supported by enhanced search functions in BRIS, enabling
searches by e.g. legal form.
Under
option 2b,
BRIS would not only be interconnected to BORIS, but also to the EU Insolvency
Registers Interconnection system (IRI). This would allow to search for information about a
particular company in BRIS and BORIS (i.e. about all limited liability companies and partnerships
covered by options 1) as well as to find out in IRI if a particular company is insolvent or not,
depending on the availability of this information at national level. The IRI interconnection system is
assessed as a separate option given that it does not use the same technology and technical
infrastructure as BRIS and BORIS, and it does not yet use EUID. Therefore, connection between
BRIS and IRI raises additional issues and requires more development.
110
111
EUID is constructed on the national registration number.
Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/369
of 1 March 2021 establishing the technical specifications and
procedures required for the system of interconnection of central registers referred to in Directive (EU) 2015/849 of the
European Parliament and of the Council.
29
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0034.png
5.2.3. Policy options 3 to ensure an adequate verification of company data before it is
entered into the business register
Policy options 3 aim to contribute to the specific objective 1, namely to
improve the reliability of
company data in business registers.
In addition, by increasing the reliability of company data,
these policy options aim to address the current insufficient trust between Member States and thus
contribute to facilitating direct use of such company data in cross-border situations (objective 2).
The options include the introduction of harmonised rules – ranging from less to more extensive ex-
ante check procedures - to ensure that company data was adequately verified in all Member States
before it was entered in business registers.
Under
option 3a,
business registers
112
in all Member States would need to carry out similar checks
in line with a harmonised list including, e.g. the identity of the applicants and compliance with legal
requirements (legality). Such checks would be carried out before the company data enters the
register, at the time of registration of a new company and each time new company data is filed.
They would apply to limited liability companies, and also to partnerships as they would be covered
by policy options 1.
Option 3b
would set some additional common procedural requirements to further ensure reliability
of company data in business registers. Such requirements could include e.g. harmonised deadlines
within which companies should file changes to their company data in the register and could require
Member States to have in place measures and processes to ensure timely filing of information and
correct data as well as obligations on business registers to keep their registers updated.
Finally, theoretically, an additional option could be considered to harmonise which authorities
should carry out the ex-ante checks in all Member States. This would ensure the highest level of
checks in all Member States. However, such an option is not included because it would not be a
realistic and politically feasible option given the important divergences between Member States (i.e.
authorities in charge include business registers, notaries, lawyers).
112
In this context business registers include any authority or person or body mandated under national law to carry out
these tasks.
30
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0035.png
5.2.4. Policy options 4 to enable direct use of company data from business registers in
cross-border situations
These policy options aim to contribute to the specific policy objective 2 i.e. enable direct use of
company data available in business registers when setting up cross-border branches/subsidiaries and
in other cross-border activities and situations. Whereas policy option 4a focuses on cases when new
subsidiaries/branches are set up, policy options 4b and 4c address the cases where already existing
companies have cross-border activities and/or are parties to cross-border administrative procedures
or court proceedings. Option 4c addresses specific formalities with specific impacts.
Option 4a
would apply when companies set up subsidiaries and branches in other Member States.
It would introduce a requirement that companies would not need to resubmit information already
filed in their national business registers in those cases (once-only principle). In practice, this would
mean that the company setting up a subsidiary or a branch would be only required to file (in that
other Member State) specific information regarding the subsidiary or branch. The needed
information about that (parent) company could be accessed directly through BRIS or it could be
exchanged between business registers via BRIS (as BRIS already provides secure means for
exchange of information between business registers and technical means to implement the once-
only principle in cross-border situations). This could take place in a similar way to the already
existing exchanges of information via BRIS.
Under
option 4b,
in addition to the requirement to apply once-only principle as described in option
4a, a harmonised company extract would be introduced for EU limited liability companies and
partnerships. Companies could use this extract in all cross-border activities and situations (including
administrative procedures and court proceedings) where they need to prove that e.g. their company
is validly incorporated. The extract would contain a common set of information (such as company
name, registered office, legal representatives) and it would constitute a digital company “identity
card” for EU companies. It would follow an example of national company extracts, but in contrast
to those, it would be recognised in all Member States without any further formalities, translated into
all EU languages, and available free of charge. In addition, Option 4b would also put an obligation
on authorities and courts to recognise certain company data (beyond that included in the common
extract) publically disclosed in other Member States’ registers. This would mean that national
registers, authorities or courts would be obliged to accept information from another Member State’s
register as an equivalent of what is required domestically. In practice, this option would mean that
authorities and courts could consult company information directly in business register and BRIS,
and the company would not be required to resubmit the existing information again (so application
of
de-facto
once-only principle).
31
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0036.png
Option 4c
would add to option 4b and ensure that specific formalities (apostille
113
) for the use of
extract and other company information in business register in cross-border activities and situations
would be abolished between Member States. Instead, business registers should provide electronic
certified copies of the required information. Use of trust services for the electronic copies and
extracts by the business registers is already required by the Codified Company Law Directive
114
. It
would also be possible to obtain certified electronic copies from BRIS. Given that the company data
is digital and mostly machine-readable
115
, this option could also abolish the requirement of certain
certified translations.
5.3.
Options discarded at an early stage
The following policy options were considered but discarded at an early stage and the reasoning is
described in Annex 10:
a) Making information on co-operatives available via BRIS (discarded for reasons of technical
feasibility).
b) Interconnecting BRIS with the Land Registers Interconnection (LRI) (discarded for reasons of
technical and legal feasibility)
c) Introducing harmonised rules for fully online formation for partnerships (discarded for reasons
of legal feasibility (it is needed first to harmonise disclosure requirements for partnerships
before introducing on-line procedures))
d) Introducing measures for virtual registered offices at EU level (discarded for reasons of
political and legal feasibility - premature)
6.
W
HAT ARE THE IMPACTS OF THE POLICY OPTIONS AND HOW DO THEY COMPARE
?
This section includes an assessment of the proposed policy options in comparison to the baseline
scenario. The impacts assessed to be relevant for the policy options in this IA were selected on the
basis of their expected magnitude, their likelihood, their relevance to stakeholders and the link to
Commission objectives in line with the Better Regulation Guidelines (see annex 4, section 1.1).
Figure below shows the selected impacts and stakeholders.
Selected impacts and stakeholders
113
In the EU, the procedure of legalisation has been largely substituted by the similar formality of the apostille. In this
Impact assessment, reference to apostille covers both apostille and legalisation.
114
Art. 16a(4) of Directive 2017/1132
115
Art. 16(6) of Directive 2017/1132 requires Member States by 1 August 2023 to ensure in a machine-readable and
searchable format or as structured data. BRIS already requires Member States to exchange specific information as
structured data.
32
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0037.png
The assessment of policy options is based on evidence e.g. from stakeholders, literature, previous
impact assessments and/or expert assessment. Each policy option is evaluated on its effectiveness,
efficiency and coherence. Under the effectiveness, it was assessed to what extent the objective is
realised by each policy option. Under efficiency, the policy options were assessed against the
selected impacts and under coherence, the assessment was about what extent each policy option
improves internal and external coherence. All the available evidence is translated into scores (0-5).
In the scoring, the options are compared to the baseline and not between the options (see annex 4,
section 2.1.2).
As to the efficiency assessment, the scoring system (0-5) is similar for costs and benefits compared
to the baseline. This means that a) for the costs, the score shows the increase in costs and b) for
benefits the score shows an increase in benefits. For example, score 0 means that no impact, while
score 2 means rather limited increase in costs/benefits, 5 means very large increase in costs/benefits.
Policy options are then compared to select a preferred option on each main issue.
The following sub-sections summarise the results of the assessment.
6.1.
Policy options 1 to make more company information available in business
registers and/or BRIS
Effectiveness
PO1a = partnerships and third country company branches in BRIS
PO1b = PO1a + cross-border group structures and ownership in national registers and BRIS
PO1c = PO1b + place of management and of the main economic activity in national registers and BRIS
33
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0038.png
PO1a
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount and improving the reliability of company
data available in business registers and accessible cross-border through BRIS
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of company data available in business registers
when setting up cross-border branches/subsidiaries and in other cross-border activities and
situations
2
1
PO1b
3
2
PO1c
5
3
All the policy options are relevant and would contribute to addressing objective 1 because they will
increase the amount of company data in business registers and BRIS, and address the needs of
stakeholders who confirmed in consultation activities that they needed these types of data about
companies from other Member States. While option 1a will cover 2 million partnerships and also
third-country branches, 1b applies in addition to 135,450 cross-border groups and single member
limited liability companies, and option 1c will add to those information about place of management
and of the main economic activity of 16 million limited liability companies. Option 1c will thus be
most effective as it will make most company information available in business registers and BRIS
and will have most impact on increasing the transparency in the market.
The objective of enabling direct use of company data in cross-border situations will be achieved
primarily by measures described below but policy options 1 will also contribute indirectly as
company data can only be used cross-border if it is available in business registers and cross-border
through BRIS. For the same reasons as above, option 1c will contribute the most to objective 2.
Efficiency
Main categories of impacts
Benefits for businesses
Trust and transparency in the market
Ease of doing business and access to the market (cross-border)
Administrative burden reduction for companies
Costs for businesses
Administrative burden increase for companies (one-off)
Benefits for business registers/public authorities
Savings related to operational costs for business registers (recurrent)
Savings related to operational costs for other public authorities (recurrent)
Costs for business registers/public authorities
Adjustment costs for business registers (one-off/recurrent)
Benefits for society at large (i.e. consumers)
Fight against fraud and abuse
Digital economy
Functioning of the internal market
PO1a
2
1
-
0
2
2
2
2
1
PO1b
3
2
-
2
2
3
2
PO1c
4
2
-
4
2
3
2
3
4
2
2
(not scored separately)
These policy measures will benefit companies, in particular SMEs, as they will more easily find
comparable, multilingual (harmonised) information. Better access to information about business
partners and potential clients in other Member States should make doing business easier for
companies. In addition, better access to data about companies in other Member States for potential
creditors and investors might facilitate access to finance for these companies or encourage
investments in such SMEs. Policy option 1c is expected to bring highest benefits by making most
information available cross-border.
Option 1c will also bring most benefits (as compared to 1a and 1b) to business registers, other
public authorities and courts as having more comparable and easier accessible data should facilitate
their work when they look for information about companies from other Member States. It is clear
34
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0039.png
from the supporting study survey that public authorities (e.g. tax authorities) have strong interest in
the company data covered by these policy options, in particular about cross-border groups and place
of the main economic activity, both in terms of trust and because this data can contribute to the fight
against anti-competitive behaviour and abuse.
At the same time, depending on the Member State, these options may result in some new filing
costs on companies, which currently do not file such information to the register. The information
under policy option 1a is already filed in business registers, thus no new filing costs are calculated.
As regards options 1b and 1c, all those companies which do not file such information to the
business register today would need to do this as a result of the initiative subject to this impact
assessment. However, after this implementation phase, companies would need to comply with these
disclosure requirements as with any other disclosure requirements. This means that if they
eventually change their place of management or economic activity, they would need to file this
change to the business register. However, such changes are only happening relatively rarely, if not
at all, during the life-time of a company. Concerning groups, in order to avoid cost, this impact
assessment aligns the filing of changes in the groups (i.e. when controlling shareholders change)
with filing of accounting documents (once in a year). As to newly created companies, this
information would be part of the filing for the incorporation/registration of new companies and is
thus assumed to be included in the overall incorporation/registration fee.
The filing costs will be one-off costs and Member States should not charge separately for these
items. Their implementation could be spread over time (i.e. companies will have e.g. 3 years to file
this information). Alternatively, it could be considered that business registers should not charge for
this initial filing to avoid administrative burden on companies and also because this does not
represent a loss of existing revenue for business registers. However, because there are some
adjustment costs for business registers and loss of revenue due to other measures in this initiative,
this impact assessment takes a conservative approach and assesses potential filing costs for those
companies which need to do this new filing.
These costs will be higher under option 1c as more companies fall under its scope, i.e. not only
groups, but all those limited liability companies which do not currently file the place of
management and place of the main economic activity. The potential filing cost is calculated for 14
million companies which is a very high (in other words, conservative) estimate given that such
information already exists in a number of Member States (see footnote 119). On that basis, the costs
are estimated to amount to around EUR 311 million one-off cost
116
. This means around 22 EUR per
company which needs to file this information. These options will also each impose some one-off IT
development costs for business registers, estimated at EUR 2.7 million (EUR 100,000 per Member
State)
117
.The efficiency of this option is overall positive given that in spite of one-off costs for
companies and business registers, it will have strong recurrent benefits in terms of trust and
transparency in the market for all stakeholders, and ease of doing business and access to the market
for companies. Although it is difficult to estimate the value of information, according to the recent
116
According to the supporting study, in 7 Member States both information about the place of management and place of
the main economic activity is already registered, which corresponds to around 5.6 million limited liability companies
for whom there will be no new costs. Consequently, around 10 million remaining limited liability companies would
need to bear this one-off cost of filing this information as a result of implementation of this initiative. However, this
impact assessment has taken a very conservative approach and has estimated the potential cost for 14 million limited
liability companies without deducting those 5,6 million companies. This would mean that the total one-off cost for
option 1c could be EUR 220 million instead of 311 million estimated in this impact assessment.
117
In carrying out those IT developments, Member States will be able to build on and benefit from their recent IT
developments and investments meet their targets on digitalisation. This may lower their adjustment cost.
35
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0040.png
estimate
118
, the value of basic company information (e.g. registered addresses, company numbers,
dates of incorporation, nature of business) was estimated at approximately £800 (950 euros) per
user per year. It can be reasonably assumed that the value of reliable information in the cross border
context in the EU in BRIS would not be less, but probably significantly higher than the value of
information in a national setting as described by the White Paper cited.
More information about companies will lead to increased transparency and trust about companies in
the single market and help companies to do business cross-border, consumers to make informed
choices when dealing with companies from other Member States, and authorities to tackle fraud or
abuse.
Coherence
Options 1a, 1b and 1c are all coherent and complementary with the other policy options in the
initiative with the following scores: 3, 4 and 5 (see annex 4, section 2.4). In particular, the more
company data is made available (options 1) and the more reliable it is (options 3), the more its use
can be facilitated under options 4. Interconnection of different EU systems (options 2) will also
provide an easier access to wider company data and thus complement options 1. Option 1c ensures
the most coherence as it provides most company data that can be consulted through interconnection
with other systems under option 2 and used under option 4.
All options ensure coherence with relevant EU law and other EU initiatives. In particular, options
are coherent with EU rules and international standards in the area of anti-money
laundering/countering the financing of terrorism, respectively the AML Directive and the FATF
standards
119
as having more company data available facilitates the implementation of anti-money
laundering/countering the financing of terrorism measures, correctness of beneficial ownership data
as well as authorities’ work to fight abuse of corporate entities. The options are also coherent with
initiative on the European single access point (ESAP) for financial market information, as ESAP
focuses mainly on entity and product related information that is relevant mainly for investors, with
the purpose of serving market needs. The Open Data Directive regulates the re-use of data held by
Member States’ public authorities for commercial or non-commercial purposes, which is not
covered by the planned initiative. Finally, this initiative will be relevant for recent taxation
initiatives as more transparency will help tax authorities’ work when in need of reliable company
data. In particular, information on groups and place of management and economic activity will be
valuable data for taxation.
6.2.
Policy options 2 to interconnect BRIS with other systems and enable better
searches
Effectiveness
PO2a = Interconnection of BRIS with beneficial ownership register interconnection system (BORIS), use
of EUID (European unique company identifier), new search functionalities in BRIS
PO2b = PO2a + Interconnection with insolvency registers interconnection system (IRI)
PO2a
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount and improving the reliability of company data
available in business registers and accessible cross-border through BRIS
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of company data available in business registers when
setting up cross-border branches/subsidiaries and in other cross-border activities and situations
118
PO2b
4
2
3
2
“Corporate Transparency and Register Reform White Paper” from the UK Department for Business, Energy &
Industrial Strategy.
119
In particular Recommendation 24 as amended in March 2022.
36
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0041.png
Both options are relevant for objective 1 because they facilitate access to important company
information by interconnecting BRIS with other EU level interconnection systems. The use of
EUID to link information about a particular company across those systems would make it possible
to search for more company data in one place. Across all consultation activities, the majority of
respondents were in favour of linking BRIS both with the interconnection of beneficial ownerships
registers (BORIS) and of insolvency registers (IRI). Member State experts have also considered
such interconnection beneficial. Additional search functionalities in BRIS (e.g. also by legal form) –
supported by majority of respondents to the public consultation and the consulted SMEs - would
also contribute to this objective by making it easier to find company data in BRIS. Policy option 2b
is the most effective measure to meet the objective as it will connect BRIS with two other
interconnection systems and facilitate search for more company data.
The specific objective 2 will be achieved primarily by measures described below. However, the use
of the EUID as a unique company identifier will also contribute to facilitating the cross-border use
of company data by helping to unequivocally identify companies and e.g. their cross-border
branches, companies which are part of cross-border mergers, divisions or conversions. This
information is valuable to all stakeholders including creditors and shareholders. Making it possible
to search for more company data in one place through interconnecting BRIS with other systems can
also indirectly facilitate the cross-border use of company data.
Efficiency
Main categories of impacts
Benefits for businesses
Trust and transparency in the market
Ease of doing business and access to the market (cross-border)
Administrative burden reduction for companies (recurrent)
Costs for businesses
Administrative burden increase for companies
Benefits for business registers/public authorities
Savings related to operational costs for business registers (recurrent)
Savings related to operational costs for other public authorities (recurrent)
Costs for business registers/public authorities
Adjustment costs for business registers (one-off/recurrent)
Benefits for society at large (i.e. consumers)
Fight against fraud and abuse
Digital economy
Functioning of the internal
PO2a
3
1
1
-
2
2
-
PO2b
4
1
1
-
3
3
-
2
3
3
3
(not scored separately)
These options will reinforce trust and transparency in the market as stakeholders will be able to
search information about a specific company more easily in several registers with the help of the
unique company identifier (EUID). BRIS connected with BORIS (option 2a) would already bring
benefits but these would be higher if BRIS is also connected with IRI (option 2b) as then more
company information is accessible in one place for all stakeholders, increasing also trust in the
market. EUID exists today for around 16 million limited liability companies and their cross-border
branches in BRIS. BORIS also uses it. By extending its use to partnerships and using it to also
connect information in IRI, the company is unequivocally identified in every register and that data
in different registers is connected to the same company. EUID has no cost implications on
companies. It is based on the national registration number.
37
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0042.png
Companies would save in searching cost for looking for information about a specific company in
other Member States, which would make it easier to do business with partners abroad. Public
authorities would also be able to consult the company information directly without the need to
search or ask companies for it. Easier access to more sets of information would in particular
facilitate the work of authorities and obliged entities
120
to implement e.g. anti-money
laundering/countering the financing of terrorism rules, ensure the correctness of beneficial
ownership data as well as to fight fraud and abuse. For example, the obliged entities under the Anti-
Money Laundering Directive or those dealing with insolvency procedures could cross-check the
company information directly through BRIS. Business registers would also benefit as it would be
possible to check all data via accessing one interconnection of registers instead of two or three.
There will be adjustment cost neither for companies nor for business registers. The IT development
needs to be done centrally by the Commission (to connect interconnection systems). The adjustment
cost for the EU budget is estimated to be EUR 100,000 for option 2a and EUR 500,000 for option
2b. Due to technical reasons, the connection with BORIS is less costly than with IRI.
Thus, overall policy option 2b will be more efficient. Linking EU level systems of interconnection
would strongly contribute to creating more connected public administrations at EU level and cross-
border. In addition, the use of EUID would make it possible to also connect other EU level
systems/registers (as the example of EPREL shows) to BRIS, bringing further benefits and
contributing to a more digitalised Single Market.
Coherence
Options 2 are coherent and complementary to other policy options, in particular to options 1 (as
explained above), but also to options 3 and 4. Option 2a got score 4 and option 2b score 5 (see
annex 4 section 2.4). The use of EUID as company identifier enables the unequivocal identification
of the company and can thus connect the company information in different registers. It also
connects companies and their cross-border branches and in a similar way it can be used to connect
parent companies and their subsidiaries and can thus help to implement policy options 3 and also
the use of company data in cross-border situations under options 4. Coherence is higher for option
2b as it is coherent with both the relevant anti-money laundering rules (beneficial owners’ registers)
and insolvency rules.
6.3.
Policy options 3 to ensure an adequate verification of company data before it is
entered into the business register
Effectiveness
PO3a = obligation to check a harmonised list of elements
PO3b = PO3a + common basic procedural requirements for ensuring reliable and up-to-date data
PO3a
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount and
improving the reliability
of company data
available in business registers and accessible cross-border through BRIS
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of company data available in business registers when
setting up cross-border branches/subsidiaries and in other cross-border activities and situations
3
2
PO3b
4
4
120
Under the AML Directive, all private sector operators subject to AML/CFT requirements (e.g. credit institutions, real
estate agents, notaries, certain persons trading in goods) must perform verifications on their clients. This includes the
need to identify the customer and verify their identity (in the case of corporate clients the identification and verification
of the company and its beneficial owners)
38
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0043.png
Policy 3a will be effective in improving the reliability of company data, i.e. ensuring that companies
and other stakeholders can trust it. It will require business registers
121
in all Member States to do
similar checks before company data enters the register. Common rules for verification of company
data are an adequate and important means to ensure its reliability; this was confirmed by
respondents to the public consultation and company law professors
122
. In addition, legal
professionals, in particular notaries underlined the importance of adequate checks for ensuring the
reliability of company data in registers. Option 3b will be even more effective in reaching objective
1 by setting additional procedural requirements (e.g. deadlines for filing company data to the
register, measures to ensure timely and correct filing).
Both options will also contribute to achieving objective 2 as increasing the reliability of company
data should address the current insufficient trust in company data between Member States, and
facilitate its direct (i.e. without additional formalities) use in cross-border situations. Policy 3b will
be more effective as it will lead to more reliable company data and more trust.
Efficiency
Main categories of impacts
Benefits for businesses
Trust and transparency in the market
Ease of doing business and access to the market (cross-border)
Administrative burden reduction for companies (recurrent)
Costs for businesses
Administrative burden increase for companies
Benefits for business registers/public authorities
Savings related to operational costs for business registers (recurrent)
Savings related to operational costs for other public authorities (recurrent)
Costs for business registers/public authorities
Adjustment costs for business registers (one-off/recurrent)
Enforcement costs for business registers (recurrent)
Benefits for society at large (i.e. consumers)
Fight against fraud and abuse
Digital economy
Functioning of the internal market
PO3a
3
2
-
-
1
3
2
1
PO3b
4
3
-
-
2
4
2
2
3
4
1
1
(not scored separately)
These two options will strongly contribute to creating more trust and more legal certainty in the
market for all stakeholders. While making company data increasingly available (policy options 1) is
the pre-requisite, the creation of the necessary trust requires that such data is accurate and up-to-
date. Therefore, the benefits will be higher for option 3b as the additional basic common procedural
requirements will make the data more trustworthy and lead to increased legal certainty.
Such increased trust and legal certainty will be beneficial for companies, and should reduce
transaction costs because third parties, such as creditors and shareholders, can rely on company
data. Similarly, the increased legal certainty under both measures, but to a larger extent under
option 3b, can benefit business registers and other authorities, as it should result in them trusting
company data from registers in other Member States and reduce the need for additional documents
121
In this context business registers include any authority or person or body mandated under national law to carry out
these tasks.
122
ICLEG report on use of company data.
39
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0044.png
from companies. Overall, having more reliable company data in business registers would make such
data easier to use cross-border.
These policy options would on their own not result in a tangible reduction or increase in
administrative burden for companies as the requirements will mostly address business registers. The
costs are estimated to amount up to EUR 4 million for all business registers. Whether any additional
resources would be needed, will depend on the Member State and the checks already in place at
national level. In this context, some business registers
123
expected increases in adjustment costs to
be small as ex-ante checks were already in place. In particular option 3b may also create some
limited enforcement costs for some business registers due to need to ensure timely and correct filing
of company information and to keep registers updated.
The efficiency of this option is considered overall to be positive as improving reliability of
company data would enhance trust between Member States and create more legal certainty in the
Single Market, which is essential for companies to be able to exercise their fundamental freedoms
and for consumers to make informed choices about and trust companies from other Member States.
These measures will also contribute to fighting against abuse.
Coherence
Options 3 are pre-requisite for making the company data available under options 1 more reliable.
Having more reliable company data in business registers will bring more trust and more legal
certainty in the market and between Member States and lay down foundations for cross-border use
of such data without burdensome formalities under options 4. These policy options are therefore
fully coherent and complementary. They were scored both to 4 (see annex 4, section 2.4).
Policy options, in particular Option 3b, are coherent with the EU rules and international standards in
the area of anti-money laundering/countering the financing of terrorism, in particular with FATF
recommendation 24
124
. These options also aim to ensure that the company data is adequate, accurate
and up-to-date. Finally, enhanced ex-ante controls under these options could also contribute to
implementation of current EU taxation initiatives taxation, fight against abuse or fraudulent
companies and to the effective implementation of sanctions against Russia and Belorussia and, in
general, to all areas (e.g. social policy, transportation) where trustworthy company data is needed.
There is no significant difference between the two options.
6.4.
Policy options 4 to enable direct use of company data from business registers in
cross-border situations
Effectiveness
PO 4a = Once-only principle (no resubmission of company information) when a company from a Member
State sets up subsidiaries or branches in other Member States
PO 4b = PO4a + harmonised company extract and mutual recognition principle for certain company data
PO 4c = PO4b + abolition of formalities (apostille)
PO4a
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount and improving the reliability of company data
available in business registers and accessible cross-border through BRIS
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of company data available in business registers
when setting up cross-border branches/subsidiaries and in other cross-border activities and
situations
123
124
PO4b
2
4
PO4c
2
5
1
3
Taking part in consultations in context of the supporting study.
Which includes obligations on business registers.
40
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0045.png
All the options are effective, to different degrees, in meeting the objective 2 to enable direct use of
company data in business registers in cross-border situations. Option 4a already provides a
significant improvement because it results in fully direct use of data about parent companies
(without the need for the parent companies to resubmit information) between business registers in
different Member States when setting up cross-border subsidiaries and branches. However, options
4b and 4c will be more effective as they will in addition address obstacles in other cross-border
activities including in administrative or courts procedures. Option 4c will be most effective as it will
in addition also remove formalities (apostille), in line with calls from stakeholders.
Measures under policy options 4 can indirectly contribute to objective 1 as well. For instance,
introducing a common company extract with a common set of company data, translated into all EU
languages will mean that every company has the same data in the extract, and that this data is thus
comparable and multilingual, which contributes to the transparency and creates more trust about
companies.
Efficiency
PO 4a
Benefits for businesses
Trust and transparency in the market
Ease of doing business and access to the market
Administrative burden reduction for companies (recurrent)
Costs for businesses
Administrative burden increase for companies
Benefits for business registers/public authorities
Operational cost savings for business registers (recurrent)
Operational cost savings for public authorities (recurrent)
Cost for business registers/public authorities
Adjustment costs for business registers (recurrent)
Adjustment costs for other public authorities (recurrent)
Benefits for society at large (i.e. consumers)
Fight against fraud and abuse
Digital economy
Functioning of the internal market
2
3
1
-
2
-
1
1
2
3
PO 4b
3
4
4
-
2
2
2
2
PO 4c
3
5
5
-
2
3
2
2
3
3
4
4
(not scored separately)
These policy options build in particular on the policy options 3 which will make company data
more reliable. When Member States (including business registers) trust each other and that the
company data in other Member States is correct, there is no need for double submission of
documents when setting up cross-border subsidiaries and branches. The policy option 4c will score
the highest as it will bring direct benefits.
These policy options will facilitate the expansion of companies to other Member States’ markets by
setting up cross-border subsidiaries (new company) and branches (new fixed establishment) as well
as facilitating other cross-border activities. They will remove an important administrative burden
for companies. Under option 4a, companies would save substantially by the introduction of once-
only-principle as they would not have to submit any documents about a parent company when
setting up cross-border subsidiaries and branches. Every year, this would concern around 4,000 new
cross-border subsidiaries and 4,500 new cross-border branches with annual recurrent savings for
companies estimated to amount to EUR 7.5 million.
Benefits would be even higher with introduction of a free multilingual common company extract
under option 4b, which companies would be able to use in cross-border activities be it in the context
of cross-border trade, services, public procurement, and which would not require certified
41
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0046.png
translation. The annual savings for companies under option 4b are estimated at EUR 330 million.
The option 4c would bring the highest benefits as also the apostille would not be needed. The
annual savings under option 4c are estimated to amount to around EUR 437 million. The reduction
of administrative burden will help in particular SMEs, which represent 98-99% of limited liability
companies in the EU, not only to set up cross-border subsidiaries and branches but also reduce
formalities in all their cross-border activities be it cross-border trade, services, cross-border sub-
contracting; this impact would be relevant as around 40% of SMEs are engaged in cross-border
activities.
There should be also benefits for business registers due to cost savings because they would not need
any more to ask and examine many documents from companies from other Member States. Some
business registers
125
were of the view that the application of the once-only principle (under option
4a) and the common extract (under option 4b) would bring more benefits than costs. This impact
assessment assumes that the option 4a, which introduces the implementation of the once-only
principle via BRIS, would amount to similar costs as those related to the implementation of earlier
exchanges between business registers through BRIS. Therefore, it is estimated that option 4a will
incur a one-off average cost of EUR 2.7 million euros to business registers (i.e. 100,000 EUR per
Member State)
126
. In addition, under option 4a companies setting up cross-border subsidiaries and
branches would do not need an extract which represents an estimated loss of revenue of 41,000
EUR per year for business registers. Under options 4b and 4c, it is estimated that the common
extract would be available free of charge for companies for cross-border use once per year and are
to amount to a loss of revenue of EUR 7.9 million per year for business registers.
As to other authorities, they would also benefit from the mutual recognition of company data as
they could accept information from another Member State’s register as an equivalent of what is
required domestically and consult company information directly in business register and BRIS.
There would also be savings from the common company extract - in particular in time and resources
of handling company information - as public authorities would not have to ask for and examine
additional documents. In practice, authorities and courts could consult company information
directly in business register and BRIS and the company would not be required to resubmit the
existing information (so application of
de-facto
once-only principle) which would in turn result in
burden reduction not only for the public authorities, but also for the companies. On the other hand,
those public authorities in charge of issuing apostille will face loss of revenue, which under option
4a and 4b, are estimated to amount to EUR 74,000 per year. Under option 4c, the loss of revenue
would be EUR 9.5 million per year. However, public administrations also face costs for issuing the
apostille due to unclear rules and legal uncertainty. Some Member States issue apostilles
immediately, the majority of Member States need one working week. Therefore, although those
public authorities will face loss of revenue due to abolishing the apostille (fees), the overall savings
will be positive. For example, in another context, it has been estimated that by abolishing the
apostille, the administrative burdens for the public authorities would be reduced by EUR 5-7
million annually
127
.
Coherence
The measures under these options are in particular complementary to and dependent on the
measures under options 3. The facilitation of cross-border use of company data will depend on the
125
126
In the consultation activities.
In carrying out those IT developments, Member States will be able to build on and benefit from their recent IT
developments and investments meet their targets on digitalisation. This may lower their adjustment cost.
127
SWD(2013) 144 final
42
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0047.png
trust in such data between Member States. These options are thus coherent with the other elements
of the proposal and were scored as 3 (Po4a), 4 (Po4b) and 5 (Po4c) (see annex 4, section 2.4).
These options, in particular option 3c, contribute to the objective of the Communication 2030
Digital Compass: the European way for the Digital Decade to provide online key public services
online for European businesses. It also contributes to removing remaining unjustified barriers and
administrative burdens in the Single Market as described in the European Council conclusions of
24-25 March 2022. The initiative pursues the objective of the Public Documents Regulation
128
by
removing unnecessary formalities (apostille) for companies in cross-border situations, similarly to
how it was achieved by that Regulation for citizens. Finally, it is fully coherent with the Single
Digital Gateway Regulation as the latter provides for online cross-border administrative procedures
but excludes from its scope company law procedures.
6.5.
Comparison of impacts
The table below summarises the results of the assessment of all policy options described in section
6. The policy options were compared by way of a multi-criteria analysis (MCA) taking into account
their effectiveness, efficiency, coherence and proportionality. The purpose of the MCA was to
assess how the costs compared to benefits. The MCA relied on two components, the scores assigned
to each policy option and on weights assigned to each impact representing its relative importance. A
single score was awarded per policy option on a scale 0-5 based on the in-depth analysis of the
available evidence, both quantitative and qualitative
129
. The weights were impacted by the related
stakeholders, the nature of the impact (one-off or recurrent) and the link to the policy objectives.
The total weighted score for each policy option was calculated as the scores of each policy options
against the identified impacts, multiplied by the weight assigned to each specific impact. The
weighted values of the costs were subtracted from the benefits
130
.
Effectiveness was weighted 30%, efficiency 60% and coherence 10%. All options lead to a net
benefit, indicating that the benefits outweigh the costs. Option 1c scores higher mainly due to
effectiveness. Option 2b is the highest in all three aspects. Option 3b has the highest score in
effectiveness and efficiency. Option 4c ranks highest in all three aspects. The results of the MCA
summarised in the following table show that policy options 1c, 2b, 3b and 4c rank highest.
Weights
PO1a PO1b
30%
0,450 0,750
Effectiveness
60%
0,264 0,306
Efficiency
10%
0,300 0,400
Coherence
Total
100% 1,014 1,456
PO1c
1,200
0,231
0,500
1,931
PO2a
0,750
0,583
0,400
1,733
PO2b
0,900
0,725
0,500
2,125
PO3a PO3b PO4a PO4b
0,750 1,200 0,600 0,900
0,375 0,536 0,497 0,919
0,400 0,400 0,300 0,400
1,525 2,136 1,397 2,219
PO4c
1,050
1,119
0,500
2,669
A separate sensitivity test was performed considering 45-45-10% ratio for effectiveness, efficiency
and coherence. In addition, a partial sensitivity test was performed on 12 main assumptions of the
calculations of costs and benefits. These sensitivity tests confirmed the robustness of the results
131
.
128
129
Regulation (EU) 2016/1191
amending Regulation (EU) No 1024/2012
See introduction to section 6 above and annex 4, sections 2.1-2.4.
130
For more detailed explanation, see annex 4, section 2.5.1 on multi-criteria analysis.
131
See annex 4.
43
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0048.png
7.
PREFERRED OPTION
7.1.
Package of preferred measures
Based on the assessment above, the preferred option consists of a package of the following
measures. The measures under the four main areas are mutually reinforcing. The options 1 and 2
provide more company data available cross-border and easier access to it, while option 3 ensures
that such data is more reliable and can be trusted by all stakeholders. Making the data more reliable
under option 3 is also the prerequisite for enabling the direct use of such data cross-border.
Therefore, they are all needed to most comprehensively address the drivers of the problems and to
achieve the objectives of the planned initiative.
In line with the principle of proportionality, the initiative will not go beyond what is necessary to
achieve those objectives. It is targeted (as it focuses on the needs of direct users to access and use
cross-border official company data from business registers) and it addresses cross-border aspects
which could not be achieved by Member States on their own. That option will provide a clear net
benefit for companies and society as a whole.
Making more company data
available in business registers
and/or BRIS
Policy option 1c:
Making information about partnerships and third country
company branches available in BRIS, and making information about cross-border
group structures and ownership as well as place of management and place of the
main economic activity available in national registers and BRIS
Policy option 2b: Connecting
BRIS with beneficial ownership registers
interconnection system (BORIS) and with Insolvency Registers interconnection
system (IRI), use of EUID (European unique company identifier) and new search
functionalities in BRIS
Policy option 3b:
Obligation to check a harmonised list of elements and common
basic procedural requirements for ensuring reliable and up-to-date data
Policy option 4c:
Once-only principle (no resubmission of company information)
when a company from a Member State sets up subsidiaries or branches in other
Member States, harmonised company extract, mutual recognition principle for
certain company data and abolition of formalities (apostille)
Interconnecting BRIS with other
systems and enabling better
searches
Ensuring adequate verification
company data before it is entered
into the business registers
Enabling direct use of company
data from business registers in
cross-border situations
This package of measures tackles the identified drivers and addresses the objectives in the most
effective and efficient way, while being coherent with other EU initiatives.
7.2.
Impacts of the package
Economic impacts
The package of preferred measures, by making more important company data publicly available in
business registers and at EU level through BRIS and improving its reliability, will reduce overall
administrative burden on companies and in turn facilitate access to finance and the creation of
businesses. In addition, the facilitation of the cross-border use of such data, when creating new
subsidiaries or branches cross-border or in other cross-border situations, including administrative or
court procedures, will result in important recurrent cost savings and thus will substantially ease
conducting cross-border business activities and facilitate access to other Member States’ markets.
By increasing transparency and trust in the market as well as by facilitating cross-border company
creation and having a positive impact on cross-border activities, the initiative should stimulate
cross-border trade, services and investment flows and thus contribute to the competitiveness and
growth in the Single Market. These measures will apply to around 16 million limited liability
companies and 2 million partnerships in the EU.
44
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0049.png
The package will result in some implementation costs for certain companies. These costs will only
apply to companies, which currently do not file information to the business register. These will be
one-off costs and Member States should not charge separately for these items. Their implementation
could be spread over time (i.e. companies will have e.g. 3 years to file this information). These one-
off costs are estimated to amount to around EUR 311 million
132
. On the other hand, companies
which are or are planning to engage in cross-border business activities and/or creating new cross-
border subsidiaries or branches, will benefit from recurrent annual savings (burden reduction) of
around EUR 437 million per year. When comparing the one-off cost (around 311 million) against
recurrent annual savings for companies (around 437 million per year), it is clear that the
benefits
much outweigh the one-off costs and that the initiative will bring significant burden reduction for
companies in the Single Market.
Impacts on SMEs
133
The planned initiative, as the already existing EU company law
acquis,
does not make a distinction
between SMEs and larger companies and all companies fall under its scope of application. As the
SMEs account for 98-99% of limited liability companies in the EU and around 40% of SMEs are
engaged in cross-border activities and operations or investing cross-border, the initiative will be
particularly beneficial to them.
The easier access to company data and the removal of administrative and financial barriers for its
cross-border use will be in particular beneficial to SMEs as they do not have the financial and
administrative resources of large companies. SMEs will also strongly benefit from increased legal
certainty as they are more affected by unclear and complex rules than bigger companies. It has been
estimated that where a big company spends one Euro per employee because of a regulatory duty, a
small business might have to spend on average up to ten Euros
134
. The initiative also responds to the
calls to facilitate the expansion of start-ups in the Single Market made in the EU Start-up Nations
Standard
135
.
Impacts on business registers and other public authorities
This package is a continuation of developments related to digitalisation that have been taking place
in company law so far. The increased accessibility and reliability of company data, and better
connections between registers, thanks to the once-only principle and also interconnecting other EU
level systems/registers to BRIS, should facilitate registers’ work due to easier search for company
data from other Member States and reduced need to request documents from companies.
132
These one-off costs are estimated on the assumption that the policy option 1c subject to this impact assessment
would cover cross-border groups and place of management and economic activity for all limited liability companies
which do not file such information today. However, if the policy option 1c would have a different scope e.g. include
also domestic groups and cover the place of management and economic activity only in cases where the place of
management or economic activity is in a different country than the registered office, the costs would be less than those
estimated in this impact assessment. This is because although the number of groups would be higher, the number of
limited liability companies needing to file the information about place of management/economic activity would be only
a fraction of the estimated 14 million companies. Therefore, number of domestic groups and number of limited liability
companies which have place of management/economic activity in another country than their registered office would be
much less than 14 million and therefore the estimation in this impact assessment represents a conservative estimation in
all scenarios.
133
See also SME test in Annex 13.
134
‘Models to reduce the disproportionate regulatory burden on SMEs. Report of the Expert Group’, European
Commission, May 2007
135
Startup Nations Standard -
to make it possible to submit legal documents from other EU jurisdictions as proof for the
incorporation of a start-up (or creation of a subsidiary of an existing start-up expanding in the single market)
45
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0050.png
The increased trust and legal certainty will not only benefit companies but also business registers
and other authorities, as it should result in them trusting company data from registers in other
Member States and therefore reduce the need for additional documents from companies. In
addition, this package ensures a more secure and business-friendly environment, which contributes
to incentivising companies to remain and expand in the Single Market as well as attracting new
investments, which will also benefit business registers.
The package is expected to entail one-off costs for business registers to adapt the IT systems of
around EUR 5.4 million, and recurrent costs e.g. to carry out ex-ante verification of company data,
estimated at around EUR 4 million per year for all business registers. In this context, some business
registers
136
expected increases in adjustment costs to be limited as ex-ante checks were already in
place. It is also likely that there will be some loss of revenue e.g. for those business registers, which
charge access fees for company extracts, estimated at around EUR 7.9 million for all business
registers together. However, in the consultation activities, some business registers
137
were of the
view that the application of the once-only principle and the common extract would bring more
benefits than costs.
As to other public authorities, they would also be able to consult the company information directly
from business registers. Easier access to more sets of information would in particular facilitate the
work of authorities and obliged entities
138
to implement e.g. anti-money laundering/countering the
financing of terrorism rules and improve the reliability of beneficial ownership data. It would also
help to fight fraud and abuse. In general, other authorities and courts could consult company
information directly in business register and BRIS and the company would not be required to
resubmit the existing information which would in turn result in burden reduction also for public
authorities. On the other hand, public authorities in charge of issuing apostille will face loss of
revenue, which is estimated to amount to EUR 9.5 million per year. However, due to current
unclear rules, legal uncertainty and the related human resources and time needed to issue an
apostille, the abolishing of the apostille is estimated to result in overall administrative burden
reduction
139
.
Impacts on the functioning of the Internal Market
140
The package of preferred measures is expected to be highly beneficial for companies, in particular
SMEs, and the society in general, including consumers, due to its expected strong positive impact
on ease of doing business and access to the markets in the EU, and on providing more trust and
transparency of company data across the EU. More available, accessible and reliable cross-border
company data will also facilitate the fight against abuse and fraud and this initiative will thus
contribute to creating a fairer Single Market. This will consequently increase the competitiveness of
the law abiding companies and lead to a fairer share of the market in which each company is doing
business.
136
137
Taking part in consultations in the supporting study.
In the consultation activities.
138
Under the AML Directive, all private sector operators subject to AML/CFT requirements (e.g. credit institutions, real
estate agents, notaries, certain persons trading in goods) must perform verifications on their clients. This includes the
need to identify the customer and verify their identity (in the case of corporate clients the identification and verification
of the company and its beneficial owners)
139
SWD(2013) 144 final
140
Given that there is an overlap with other impacts in this Impact Assessment, the impact on the functioning of the
Internal Market was not counted separately.
46
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0051.png
The free movement of goods, services and capital will be easier as businesses will be able to extend
their operations cross-border with less administrative burden. Easier cross-border setting up and
activities for companies can also lead to more employment. Downstream, consumers will have
better access to company information and thus will be in a position to make better informed
decision when buying or contracting with companies from other Member States. Alone the value of
basic company data is estimated to be at approximately £800 (950 euros) per direct user per year in
a purely national setting
141
.
It can be reasonably assumed that the value of reliable information in
the cross border context of the EU BRIS would be significantly higher.
Impact on digitalisation and related environmental impacts
The initiative aims to upgrade the EU digital company law further through the use of digital tools
and processes. It will make more company data available online through BRIS, on the e-Justice
portal. It will also better connect public authorities working with companies and company data, both
by introducing the use of the once-only principle but also by connecting other EU level
systems/registers to BRIS and using the EUID (as the example of EPREL shows). Connecting EU
level systems of interconnection would strongly contribute to creating more connected public
administrations at EU level and cross-border, and contribute to a more digitalised Single Market.
Finally, the measures addressing the abolishing of the formalities (apostille) rely on the use of BRIS
for secure digital exchange and co-operation between registers, e.g. in the context of the once-only
principle to set up subsidiaries/branches in other Member States. The initiative will introduce a
digital harmonised company extract and will focus on the use of electronic copies (and their
certification in line with the eIDAS Regulation). Overall, this initiative will provide ‘digital by
default’ solutions to increase transparency about EU companies and ‘digital by default’ company
law procedures to facilitate the use of the company data cross-border. In this way it will
significantly contribute to the EU digital society and economy, including directly contributing to the
objective of the Communication 2030 Digital Compass: the European way for the Digital Decade to
provide 100% of key public services online for European businesses.
The initiative could have some positive environmental impacts due to increased possibility to use
digital procedures and tools between business registers and companies, and also between business
registers in different Member States through BRIS, and an increased application of the once-only
principle, as described above. This would mean e.g. reducing the use of paper. However, these
expected impacts would be relatively small and therefore, are not assessed in detail in this IA.
Given that the expected impacts would be positive, the proposal is consistent with the ‘do no
significant harm’ principle, with the climate-neutrality objective set out in Article 2(1) of European
Climate Law
142
and the 2030 and 2040 targets.
Fundamental rights
The preferred option will facilitate the implementation of the rights of establishment in any Member
State, as prescribed by Article 15(2) of the Charter of Fundamental Rights. There should be positive
impact on companies benefitting from the opportunities offered by the Single Market, in particular
concerning the freedom to conduct business set out in Article 16 of the Charter. The preferred
option will require the disclosure and cross-border access of certain information in relation to legal
entities (e.g. limited liability companies, partnerships). However, certain personal data will also be
disclosed such as partners, single-member shareholders. This data is normally already publicly
“Corporate Transparency and Register Reform White Paper” from the UK Department for Business, Energy &
Industrial Strategy.
142
Regulation (EU) 2021/1119 of 30 June 2021 establishing the framework for achieving climate neutrality.
141
47
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0052.png
disclosed in Member States and this initiative makes such data available cross-border. Also,
Member States may process some personal data to verify the company data which is already the
case in most Member States. The interconnection of BRIS with other EU systems will not impact
the protection of personal data as each system will maintain its autonomy and independency. The
proposed solutions are necessary and proportionate to enhance transparency, create trust between
Member States when using company information cross-border and contribute to fight against fraud
and abuse and will ensure the protection of personal data in line with Article 8 of the Charter, the
EU law on data protection including the relevant case-law
143
.
7.3.
Application of the ‘one in, one out’ approach
The package of preferred measures is estimated to bring a very strong positive recurrent impact in
terms of reducing administrative burden for companies, and in particular SMEs which account for a
large share of businesses in the EU, estimated to amount to around EUR 437 million per year. In
particular, this would be due to the introduction of the once-only principle for setting up of cross-
border subsidiaries and branches, which would concern around 4.000 new cross-boder subsidiaries
and 4.500 new cross-border branches and result in annual recurrent savings estimated at EUR 7.5
million. In addition, the benefits would come from introducing the common company extract and
removing formalities (apostille) in cross-border activities and situations - be it in the context of
cross-border trade, services, public procurement - including in administrative or court procedures
and thus contributing to the application of once-only principle. Companies would also benefit from
increased transparency of company data, its improved accessibility and reliability and thus, higher
legal certainty in cross-border situations, however, these benefits cannot be monetised. The package
is also expected to be highly beneficial for the society in general, including consumers, due to its
expected positive impact on providing more accessible and reliable company data across the EU,
and therefore allowing consumers to make more informed choices when dealing with companies
from other Member States.
At the same time, depending on the Member State, the package of preferred measures may result in
some new one-off costs on companies for filing information to the register, estimated to amount to
around EUR 311 million. However, these costs would only apply to companies, which currently do
not file such information to the register and an effort would be made in the planned initiative to
limit those costs to the extent possible by e.g. spreading the implementation of such filing
requirements over time (i.e. companies would have e.g. 3 years to file this information) and
requiring Member States not to apply the initial filing costs separately for this new data. The
package would not introduce any administrative burden for consumers or citizens in general.
Overall, the recurrent savings for companies are expected to much outweigh the one-off costs
related to filing of additional company data and therefore, the planned initiative is expected to
generate recurrent net cost savings for companies, and in particular SMEs.
8.
H
OW WILL ACTUAL IMPACTS BE MONITORED AND EVALUATED
?
As a first step, the Commission will contribute to ensuring correct transposition of the package of
preferred measures, e.g. by organising transposition workshops and encouraging exchanging of best
practices, including in the context of the Commission’s Company Law Expert Group (CLEG). As a
second step, the Commission will focus on monitoring the implementation of the package to assess
if it is successful in achieving the specific objectives identified in this Impact Assessment.
143
Regulation (EU) 2016/679, Regulation (EU) 2018/1725, e.g. Case C-398/15 Manni.
48
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0053.png
The following table presents operational objectives in the form of monitoring indicators connected
to specific objectives. These possible indicators could be used for the purpose of monitoring and
could also serve as a basis for a future evaluation:
Specific
objectives
Increasing the
amount and
improving the
reliability of
company data
available in
business
registers and
accessible
cross-border
through BRIS
Operational objectives -
Monitoring indicators
- increase in number of requests for
company data available through
BRIS,
- number of requests for company
data available also through BORIS
and IRI
- increase in number of legal entities
with an EUID number
- views of stakeholders (companies,
registers, public authorities) on the
extent to which it is possible to
search for and access company data
on a cross-border basis
- reduction in costs of setting up
subsidiaries or branches cross-border
for companies
- number of issued common company
extracts
- views of stakeholders (companies,
registers, public authorities) on the
extent to which it is possible to use
company data directly on a cross-
border basis
Monitored five years
after measures are fully
implemented and
operational in the
Member States.
Business registers
Member State
representatives in
CLEG
BRIS (notifications of
cross-border
subsidiaries or
branches possibly
through BRIS)
Studies, surveys,
targeted bilateral
contacts with relevant
stakeholders
Member States
European
Commission
Monitoring period
Monitored on annual
basis, starting not
earlier than one year
from the time when the
measures are fully
implemented and
operational in the
Member States, and for
a duration of 5 years.
Sources of data
European e-Justice
portal - BRIS, BORIS,
IRI systems
Studies, surveys,
targeted bilateral
contacts with relevant
stakeholders
Actors
responsible for
collecting data
European
Commission
Enabling
direct use of
company data
available in
business
registers when
setting up
cross-border
branches/subsi
diaries and in
other cross-
border
activities and
situations
The draft proposal for the legislative initiative would include a commitment to carry out an
evaluation in the future to assess the impacts of the new initiative. It would be carried out by the
Commission on the basis of the information gathered during the monitoring exercise, and additional
input collected from the relevant stakeholders, as necessary.
49
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
A
NNEX
1: P
ROCEDURAL INFORMATION
1.
L
EAD
DG, D
ECIDE
P
LANNING
/CWP
REFERENCES
This Impact Assessment Report was prepared by DG Justice and Consumers (DG JUST).
The DECIDE Planning reference of the initiative "Upgarding Digital Company Law" is
PLAN/2021/11038. Currently it is being considered for inclusion into the 2023
Commission Work Programme.
2.
O
RGANISATION AND TIMING
Five Inter-Service Steering Group (ISSG) meetings, consisting of representatives from
various Directorates-General of the Commission, were held in 2021 and 2022 during the
preparation stage of this impact assessment.
The first meeting took place on 9 July 2021, attended by the Secretariat General, the Legal
Service, ECFIN, EMPL, TAXUD, COMP, ESTAT, TRADE, GROW, FISMA, DIGIT and
CNECT.
The second meeting was held on 3 December May 2021, attended by the Secretariat
General, the Legal Service, ESTAT, EMPL, CNECT, TAXUD, FISMA, TRADE, GROW
and ECFIN.
The third meeting was held on 23 June 2022. Representatives from the Secretariat General,
the Legal Service, MOVE, TRADE, GROW, TAXUD, REFORM, FISMA, COMP and
DIGIT were present.
The fourth meeting was held on 15 July 2022. Representatives from the Secretariat
General, TRADE, ESTAT, ECFIN, REFORM, FISMA, COMP and DIGIT were present.
The fifth meeting took place on 7 September 2022. Representatives from the Secretariat
General, the Legal Service, TRADE, ESTAT, REFORM, COMP, TAXUD, CNECT
GROW, MOVE and DIGIT were present.
All the meetings were chaired by DG JUST.
DG JUST has considered the comments made by DGs in the intermediate and final
versions of the IA.
3.
C
ONSULTATION OF THE
RSB
An Upstream meeting with the Regulatory Scrutiny Board was held on 19 May 2022.
The Impact Assessment accompanying this proposal was examined by the Regulatory
Scrutiny Board on 12 October 2022. A positive opinion with reservations was received on
50
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0055.png
14 October
144
and the recommendations from the Board were duly addressed in the final
version of the impact assessment.
RSB comments on 14 October 2022
How RSB comments have been addressed
in the IA
The Board notes the additional information The report was adapted to take into account
provided by the DG and commitments to RSB comments. See response to the RSB
make changes to the report. However, the recommendations on specific points below.
report
still
contains
significant
shortcomings.
The Board gives a positive opinion with
reservations because it expects the DG to
rectify the following aspects:
(1) The report does not provide sufficient
evidence on the consequences for
businesses of the current lack of certain data
in the business registers.
(2) The cost benefit analysis does not take
into account all the recurrent costs for
businesses resulting from this initiative.
(1) The report should strengthen the
problem definition and the problem
analysis. It should provide evidence of the
existence of a problem for each of the types
of data covered by the initiative that
warrants their inclusion in BRIS. It should
better explain, with evidence, the
consequences of the lack of this data for
businesses active in more than one Member
State. In particular, it should substantiate
the claim that the cross-border expansion of
Small and Medium Enterprises is hindered
by the current situation.
(2) The report should clearly separate
stakeholder views from other evidence. It
should explain that the need for more data is
mainly gathered through the public and the
targeted consultations. It should explain
how the stakeholders were selected, how
representative the samples are and what the
limitations of the consultation activities are.
The report should also be transparent on the
data sources for the cost and benefit
calculations.
The report was adapted to provide more
evidence of the existence of problems for
each type of company data covered in the
initiative and more explanation was added
to explain the consequences of the lack of
this data on stakeholders, including SMEs
(mainly in sections 2.1, 2.2).
In order to draw a clear division between
stakeholder views and other evidence (e.g.
on numbers of companies), a succinct
explanation
about
the
nature
of
consultations and their limitations was
added in the report (in section 2.1).
144
Link to the positive opinion of the RSB to be added.
51
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0056.png
(3) The report should make sure that all
relevant costs and benefits are taken into
account when assessing the options and
classify them correctly for the purpose of
the One In, One Out approach. In particular,
it should identify and quantify, to the extent
possible and proportionately, the recurrent
costs for existing and newly created
companies as a result of the proposed legal
obligation to disclose and file new company
data (e.g. place of management or place of
economic activity) to business registers. If
some recurrent costs are considered
negligible, the report should demonstrate it.
The report should always compare the
policy options to the baseline and correctly
take the business-as-usual costs into
account. It should also be clear how the
costs and benefits are distributed among the
stakeholder groups.
(4) The main body of the report should
clarify how the efficiency scores and the
multicriteria scores have been calculated,
i.e. how costs and benefits have been
weighted and integrated into the scores. It
should be clear from the tables in the main
report what the variations between scores
represent.
(5) The report should define measurable,
operational and time-bound objectives that
indicate if the initiative is successful or not.
These operational objectives should be
based on more precise specific objectives
The explanations about the costs which are
taken into account are now also elaborated
in the main report, including those
concerning the newly created companies.
All the policy options are compared to the
baseline. In addition to annex 3, the main
report also shows the costs and benefits per
stakeholder groups (Chapter 6, introduction
and sections 6.1-6.5).
The explanations about the efficiency scores
and multi-criteria scores and the weighting
have been added into the main report. The
detailed explanations including what the
variations between scores represent are in
the methodological annex 4 to the report
(section 6.5).
The main report now contains operational
objectives in the form of monitoring
indicators connected to specific objectives.
The text also sets the monitoring period for
the assessment of such operational
objectives, as well as an indication of the
sources of data and the actors responsible
for collecting the data (Chapter 8).
4.
E
VIDENCE
,
SOURCES AND QUALITY
The impact assessment draws on an extensive amount of desk research, external studies, a
study carried out on behalf of the Commission to accompany this IA and wide-randing
consultations described in detail in Annex 2. The input from these consultations was
collected and processed by the experts in the Company Law Unit of DG JUST (JUST A3).
Data and information were collected, amongst others, from the following sources for this
impact assessment:
52
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0057.png
Sources
Study on the disclosure and cross-
border use of company data, and
digital developments related to
company law (Milieu Consulting)
2022
Information/Summary
Supporting study for this Impact Assessment. It collects information on
relevant national company law rules of the Member States and basic relevant
data needed for the impact assessment. It collects information through
surveys to stakeholders and interviews on stakeholders needs, practical
obstacles. It also analyses technical requirements and analyses impacts of
potential measures.
An inter-governmental body, the Financial Action Task Force (FATF) is the
global money laundering and terrorist financing watchdog. It sets international
standards that aim to prevent these illegal activities and the harm they cause to
society. The information and data of the mutual evaluations of FATF were
used in this impact assessment.
https://www.fatf-gafi.org/home/
The International Business Registers Survey and Report aims to assist
business registers in comparing their own practice and performance with those
of other jurisdictions.
The International Business Registers Report 2019
(ebra.be)
A study of the Department for Business, Energy & Industrial strategy on the
planned reform of the Company house, United Kingdom.
Corporate
Transparency and Register Reform White Paper (publishing.service.gov.uk)
This report presents the findings of research commissioned by the Department
for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) to value the user benefits
of Companies House (CH) data.
Valuing the user benefits of Companies
House data: policy summary (publishing.service.gov.uk)
The Informal Company Law Expert Group held discussions, performed
research and provided recommendations to DG JUST concerning transparency
and cross-border use of company data.
This report assesses and examines the impacts of the policy options
incorporated in the BRIS Directive (Dir. 2012/17) in relation to the creation of
a system of interconnection of registers.
MARKT-2010-11309-00-01-EN-
ORI-00 (europa.eu)
This report measures and analyses the impacts of the policy options
incorporated in the Public Document Regulation (Reg. 2016/1191) in relation
to the exemption from legalisation and similar formality and simplification of
other formalities relating to certified copies as well as in relation to relevant
translations and multilingual standard forms.
EUR-Lex - 52013SC0144 - EN -
EUR-Lex (europa.eu)
The Handbook is the final publication in a series of three produced by the
Permanent Bureau of the Hague Conference on Private International Law on
the Apostille Convention following a recommendation of the 2009 meeting of
the Special Commission on the practical operation of the Convention.
Apostille Handbook, A Handbook on the Practical Operation of the Apostille
Convention, 2013
This article presents statistical data on business demography in the European
Union (EU), treating aspects such as the total number of active enterprises in
the business economy, their birth rates, and the survival rate.
Business
demography statistics - Statistics Explained (europa.eu)
This article gives an overview of multinational enterprise groups operating
in EU countries and European Free Trade Association (EFTA) countries in
FATF
EBRA reports
Corporate Transparency and Register
Reform White Paper
UK Policy summary
ICLEG papers
BRIS Impact Assessment
Public documents Impact Assessment
Permanent Bureau of The Hague
Conference on Private International
Law, Apostille Handbook
Eurostat
Business
Statistics 2022
Demography
Eurostat structure of multinational
53
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0058.png
Enterprise groups in the EU
2020, according to the data available in the EuroGroups Register (EGR).
Structure of multinational enterprise groups in the EU - Statistics Explained
(europa.eu)
The SME performance review is one of the main tools the European
Commission uses to monitor and assess countries' progress in implementing
the SME strategy and the Small Business Act. With an emphasis on the
priorities under the SME strategy and the SBA, the review brings
comprehensive information on the performance of SMEs.
SME Performance
Review (europa.eu)
This UNCITRAL Guide provides a reference tool for policymakers, registrars
and experts involved in business registries reform on the features of an
effective and efficient business registry and the minimum necessary
requirements for a business to register.
UNCITRAL Legislative Guide on Key
Principles of a Business Registry
This study provides an overview about letterbox companies mainly in the EU.
It describes the phenomenon and its characteristics, presents possible ways to
quantify letterbox companies, analyses different types and uses made of
letterbox companies, examines the role played by national company law
requirements and maps the existing measures that could have an impact on
letterbox companies.
Letterbox companies - Publications Office of the EU
(europa.eu)
SME Performance review
UNCITRAL Legislative Guide on key
principles of a business registry
Letterbox study
Nordic
Smart
Business
Government
&
This is a programme run by Nordic countries in collaboration in order to
create value for SMEs by making real time business data accessible and
usable for innovation and growth across the region, in an automatic, consent
based and secure manner.
Nordic Smart Government
The Communication on Digitalisation of justice in the European Union
proposes a toolbox of measures targeted at fostering digitalisation of justice
with the aim to improve access to justice and the efficiency of justice systems.
The approach set out in the Communication is to achieve better use of digital
technologies, in full respect to fundamental rights and the principles of
proportionality and subsidiarity.
Communication on Digitalisation of justice in
the European Union and Proposal for e-CODEX Regulation | European
Commission (europa.eu)
The document aims to identify current obstacles to the single market at the
time it was drafted.
EUR-Lex - 52020SC0054 - EN - EUR-Lex (europa.eu)
Communication on Digitalisation of
justice in the European Union. A
toolbox of opportunities
Commission Staff Working Document
Business Journey on the Single
Market: Practical Obstacles and
Barriers
Communication
Identifying
and
addressing barriers to the single
market
This Communication focuses first on the top 13 barriers to cross-border
activity, as most commonly reported by businesses (with regard to cross-
border trade or establishment) and consumers (with regard to cross-border
purchase of goods or services). The presented barriers follow the key steps of
the “journeys” that businesses and consumers make in the single market.
communication-eu-single-market-barriers-march-2020_en.pdf (europa.eu)
The objective of this survey is to make the bridge between businesses and
European policy-makers to help the latter to identify the right priorities for the
coming years.
Business Survey - The state of the Single Market
(eurochambres.eu)
Eurochambres Business Survey: The
state of the Single Market, Barriers
and Solutions 2019
54
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
A
NNEX
2: S
TAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION
(S
YNOPSIS REPORT
)
In accordance with the consultation strategy, the objective of the consultation activities
was to gather data evidence and stakeholder views for the preparation of the initiative
“Upgrading Digital Company Law” regarding i) transparency (better access to more
information about companies in the EU); ii) using company data available in national
business registers in cross-border administrative or judicial procedures; iii) using the
information in the business registers when setting up subsidiaries and branches in other
Member States; and iv) digitalising company law procedures and addressing new digital
developments in EU company law.
Specifically the consultation activities
aimed to gather the views of stakeholders about:
Existence of problems in the areas to be covered by this initiative as well as the
evidence about the magnitude and EU dimension of such problems;
Different policy options, which can be considered in the areas to be covered by this
initiative;
Data to assess better the costs and benefits of different policy options.
This annex is structured in two main chapters:
Chapter I – Consultation activities and sources of information
presents the description
of the methodology that the services of the Commission have used e.g. open public
consultation, targeted consultation of stakeholders, consultations of Member States and
expert groups, studies, workshops, surveys, interviews. It also provides information on the
main stakeholders’ groups.
Chapter II – Result of the consultation activities
analyses the results of the consultation
activities by the two main dimensions of the policy options as presented in the impact
assessment.
CHAPTER I - CONSULTATION ACTIVITIES AND SOURCES OF
INFORMATION
1.
Stakeholder groups relevant for the consultation activities
According with the consultation strategy, the relevant stakeholder groups are:
business registers,
which contain and make publicly available company
information. They are also involved in company law procedures in contacts with
companies and legal professionals, as well as in contacts with business registers in
different Member States (including through BRIS);
national authorities,
such as tax authorities, labour law authorities, courts,
beneficial owner registers, which verify information in particular about companies
from other Member States in the context of different administrative or court
proceedings;
business associations/organisations,
which represent interests of companies of
different sizes and in different sectors and can share experiences of their members
in areas to be covered by this initiative;
55
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0060.png
trade unions,
which represent employees’ interests and can share experiences of
employees e.g. as users of company data;
legal professionals,
who are involved in company procedures, such as lawyers and
notaries;
companies,
including
SMEs and start-ups,
which use company law procedures to
set up and run their businesses, including on a cross-border basis, and that need
information about companies to make well-informed business decisions;
investors, creditors,
who need information about companies to make well-
informed decisions related to their investments or business partners;
citizens,
who need to find or check information about companies;
academic experts and think tanks
with expertise on the issues to be covered by
this initiative (e.g. for research, statistical purposes);
other
users of company data or actors of company law procedures
deemed
relevant.
Consultation activities and other information sources
2.
The services of the Commission have used a wide range of methodological tools for the
consultation activities for this initiative. Consultations started early, in 2021. In particular,
DG JUST carried out the following activities:
The Commission published an
Inception Impact Assessment
on the initiative.
The feedback period started 20 July 2021 with a deadline for
feedback from
stakeholders
by 17 August 2021. In total, eight stakeholders provided feedback.
Amongst the respondents there were public authorities (business registers), business
associations, companies, citizens, legal professionals and other organisations.
(Summary available in section 3)
Open online public consultation
(the
Summary Report
is available online)
The consultation was published on 21 December 2021 and responses were accepted
until 8 April 2022. 83 organisations and individuals responded to the consultation.
Most responses came from Germany (20%), followed by Spain (13%), and Belgium
(12%), (which included replies from EU level associations), Austria (8%) and the
Netherlands (6%). There was a small number of replies from most other Member
States. Single non-EU responses were also received from Iceland, Switzerland and
Iran.
Public authorities (mainly Ministries of Justice or business registers but also
authorities/agencies dealing with specific issues such as economic crime or anti-
money laundering) from 12 different Member States including Spain, Belgium,
Sweden, Cyprus, Estonia, Finland, Latvia, Malta, the Netherlands, Poland, Portugal
and Slovakia participated in this consultation. One contribution was received from
Iceland. 12% of responses (10 out of 83) came from companies. Half were micro (1 to
9 employees), three large (250 or more employees), and one each small (10 to 49
employees) and medium (50 to 249 employees). All responding companies were
registered in a Member State (Germany, Austria, Greece, Italy, Poland and Spain).
Less than half (4) carried out (part of) their activity in several EU Member States and a
third (3) were part of a group of companies.
56
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0061.png
All questions were optional to allow stakeholders the possibility to focus on the topics
of most relevance and interest for them. Some questions were targeted at specific
stakeholders. It was also possible to provide additional information through open
questions and by uploading papers to allow stakeholders to provide the necessary
details. Respondents made use of these options and not all replied to all questions.
SME panel consultation
145
This consultation took place between 2 May and 10 June 2022. In total, 158
stakeholders replied to this consultation in the EU Survey webpage. Majority of
responses were submitted by SMEs in the form of limited liability companies: 64% by
private limited liability ones (99 out of 155) and 14% by public (22 out of 155). 5% of
replies came from partnerships (8) and 3% - from cooperatives (5). 10% of
respondents were self-employed (16). Most responses came from Portugal, followed
by Romania, Spain, Czechia and Poland. There were a few replies from Hungary and
Italy, and a couple or individual responses from some other Member States (Cyprus
and Germany, and Austria, Bulgaria and Lithuania, respectively). In terms of size of
the responding companies, 39% were micro enterprises or self-employed (1 to 9
employees), 32% small (10 to 49 employees), 22% medium (50 to 249 employees),
and 7% mid-cap and bigger companies (250 or more employees). 25% of respondents
who answered this question were part of a group of companies (39 out of 153). In a
few cases, their parent companies were located in another Member State (6) or in a
non-EU country (8) and otherwise, they were in the same Member State. The results of
the SME panel are attached in Annex13.
The Commission contracted an
external consultant
(Milieu Consulting) to carry out a
study, including specific tasks such as
desk research and literature review, analysis,
targeted e-surveys and interviews with key stakeholders
to assist the Commission
in collecting evidence, providing analysis, and cost estimates for the initiative.
The evidence collected from these activities includes: a legal mapping of the national
company law systems of all 27 Member States carried out by legal experts; an
overview of stakeholders’ needs and obstacles based on 5 surveys (to business
registers, public authorities, legal practitioners, business and financial organisations,
individual companies), which collected views from 25 business registers, 11 legal
professionals, 1 financial institution, 3 business organisations, 20 public authorities
(tax and labour) and 140 companies; and statistical data on the impacts of potential
measures.
The contractor organised, with the participation of Commission’s services,
virtual
workshops
to gather views, knowledge and data on specific issues, and to gather the
views of different stakeholder groups in more detail. During these workshops,
stakeholders had the chance to share their views including through short, targeted
145
The SME panel is a tool that allows Commission service to reach SMEs in a targeted way and are
organised in cooperation with the partners in the Enterprise Europe Network, a support network for small and
medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) bringing together, among others, chambers of commerce and industry,
regional development organisations or innovation support organisations.
57
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0062.png
surveys, and the Commission had an opportunity to go into greater depth on particular
points and to exchange and compare viewpoints in a dynamic setting.
o
A virtual
workshop with EU business registers
was held on 21 June 2022 with
the participation of representatives from nine Member States.
o
A virtual
workshop with companies
was held on 22 June 2022. It was planned
with 12 confirmed representatives of companies but due to last minute
cancellations, took place with four representatives from different Member States.
Notwithstanding to the multiple channels used to contact companies, it proved to
be difficult to have high number of companies participating in the workshop.
Nevertheless, the participating companies provided valuable input confirming the
existence of the problems relevant for this initiative and gave several practical
examples in particular concerning the difficulties faced when trying to use
company data cross-border.
DG JUST organised in Q3 2022 five
virtual interviews with legal professionals
lawyers working in the field of company law and legal counsels (in-house-lawyers)
dealing with company law employed by EU companies. These interviews gave a
valuable insight into the daily practice and difficulties in cross-border company law
and other administrative and judicial procedures. The lawyers provided concrete
examples on administrative burdens, costs and time needed for procedures. In
addition, they provided their views on what improvements to cross-border use of
company data would facilitate their work.
Bilateral meetings (targeted consultations)
were organised between DG JUST and
key stakeholders in the area of company law to discuss issues most relevant for them:
BusinessEurope
Council of the Notariats of the European Union (CNUE)
European Trade Union Confederation (ETUC)
The list of bilateral meetings and virtual interviews are included in Annex 15.
Two virtual meetings were held with the Commission
Company Law Expert group
(CLEG) bringing together Member State representatives from Ministries responsible
for company law issues on 30 September 2021 and 20 June 2022. The subgroup of
CLEG dealing with BRIS, the CLEG-BRIS, bringing together Member States
represenatives from business registers, also joined the latter meeting
146
.
The Commission
Informal Company law Expert Group
(ICLEG) consisting of 17
company law academics and practitioners from 12 Member States and EFTA countries
held six meetings during 2020, 2021 and 2022 with DG JUST where the issues
relevant for the initiative were discussed. The minutes of these meetings are available
in the Commission register of expert groups. ICLEG also drew up two reports on
issues relevant for this initiative (on transparency of company law data and on the
146
Register of Commission expert groups and other similar entities (europa.eu)
58
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0063.png
cross-border use of company data) and these will also be published in the register of
expert groups when they are finalised
147
.
CHAPTER II – RESULT OF THE CONSULTATION ACTIVITIES
The first section of this chapter analyses the results of the consultation activities. Where
the views of different stakeholder groups on the same topic were substantially different,
they are analysed and presented separately.
The second section describes other issues, which were part of a broader reflection on the
potential initiative at the beginning of the process.
The third section presents a summary of the feedback received by stakeholders on the
inception impact assessment.
Section 1: Analysis of results
For ease of presentation, the policy options are regrouped under the main objective they
seek to meet, namely increased transparency and enabling direct use of company data in
business registers in cross-border situations.
1. Transparency
Making more company information available in business registers and/or
BRIS (policy options 1)
Interconnecting BRIS with other systems and enable better searches
(policy options 2)
A large majority of consulted stakeholders, including SMEs, encountered some
difficulties
when looking for information about companies,
in particular about companies in other
Member States. Only 20% (14 out of 71) respondents to the public consultation and 13%
(14 out of 110) replying to the targeted consultation of SMEs, did not encounter any
difficulties when looking for and accessing data about companies from other Member
States.
In replies to the public consultation, the
most often mentioned difficulty
was that
information about companies in different Member States was not comparable (48%, 34 out
of 71 respondents), followed by stakeholders not being able to find/have access to the
relevant company information at EU level but only in the national business register (35%,
25 out of 71), and language difficulties (34%, 24 out of 71). In particular, lack of
comparability and not having access at EU level were listed as the top difficulties by
business associations, companies and legal professionals. Public authorities most
frequently mentioned language difficulties.
The fact that the relevant information could be only found on companies’ websites (19%,
21 respondents) or only in national business registers of companies (12%, 13 respondents)
was also mentioned as a problem
148
by SMEs responding to the SME panel. In addition,
147
148
Register of Commission expert groups and other similar entities (europa.eu)
Respondents could only choose one answer when asked about difficulties, therefore lower numbers of
respondents per difficulty.
59
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
15% of responding SMEs could not find or access the relevant company information at all
(17 out of 110).
According to the results of the public consultation, the most important
reason to have
access to company data
is to find or check information about a company, as a creditor, a
business partner or a legal professional. Similarly, according to the surveys for the
supporting study, 75% of companies indicated that they needed company information
cross-border to find information about potential business partners; 33% - for
benchmarking/market analysis purposes, and 32% - to identify legal representatives.
Company information was also needed to verify who is the authorised representative of the
company, for judicial proceedings (e.g. when company information is required by a court),
when dealing with competent authorities (e.g. when applying to get SME funding, for
taxation, for social security, for posting of workers), to make investment decisions. Other
purposes indicated by stakeholders include, risk assessments, identifying stakeholders and
intra-group transactions along with company structures, recovery of tax arrears, checking
the registration of the company along with their scope of activity and registered office.
According to legal professionals responding to the supporting study surveys company
information was in particular needed to identify legal representatives, for judicial
proceedings, for verification of company data for the preparation of contracts, to carry out
controls/checks, for due diligence purposes and for administrative purposes. The public
authorities (mainly tax authorities) responding the supporting study survey confirmed that
they needed data about companies from other Member States to check information (95%,
19 respondents), establish taxes (70%, 14 respondents) and to identify legal
representatives, detect fraud and money laundering/terrorist financing and carry out
controls and checks (60%).
A number of other problems were mentioned during consultation activities, including
difficulty to search on registers’ websites, or technical and language difficulties. Some
SMEs considered that company information in registers was not sufficiently reliable. In
addition, another difficulty reported was the need to pay fees to access information and
documents from business registers. In the surveys for the supporting study, nearly 50% of
respondents indicated this as a problem. Similarly, 73% of respondents to the public
consultation considered that there is a need to have more company data available free of
charge centrally at EU level (through BRIS). In the context of accessing the information in
national business registers, some stakeholders mentioned that it was sometimes
challenging - even for legal professionals specialised in company law - to identify the
official source of company data (i.e. website of the official business register) in other
Member States as there are many private websites also providing company information.
74% of respondents who replied to the question on being familiar with the
Business
Registers Interconnection System - BRIS - or the “Find a Company” page of the
European e-Justice portal
confirmed their familiarity (53 out of 72). Public authorities
and business associations were more familiar with BRIS as compared to companies and
EU citizens. Out of those respondents familiar with BRIS, 67% used BRIS (35 out of 52),
whereas 23% of respondents did not and 10% had no opinion. Nearly all public authorities
familiar with BRIS use it.
According to the survey for the supporting study and the SME panel, respondents mainly
used websites of companies directly to find information about companies from other
Member States (43% and 45% respectively), followed by using business registers in other
Member States (21% and 16% respectively). 8% of the respondents to the supporting study
survey and 4% to the SME panel survey - used BRIS to access cross-border company data.
60
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
In general, the majority in
all consulted stakeholder groups
(companies, authorities,
business organisations, business registers, trade unions, legal professionals, citizens)
welcomed the Commission’s initiative on Upgrading Digital Company Law and expressed
their support for making more
harmonised company information available at EU level.
Among stakeholder groups responding to the public consultation, support was strongest
from companies and legal professionals. Legal professionals (lawyers, notaries) in
particular emphasised the need for making more complete and correct company data
available cross-border from the trustworthy source (business register) with an easy access.
Business associations mentioned that measures to increase transparency should not lead to
an increase in administrative burden for companies and stressed the need to ensure a
balance between transparency and protection of other values such as privacy.
In the supporting study surveys, all stakeholder groups (especially legal practitioners,
public authorities and companies) considered that the most significant benefit from the
planned measures to make more company data available would be to enhance trust in
business environment (91% - 73% of legal practitioners, 65% - 53% of public authorities
and 56% - 53% of companies).
As regards the specific types of company data, majority of
all consulted stakeholder
groups
were in favour of making
information about other types of companies
than
limited liability companies
available centrally at EU level (through BRIS).
For instance,
71% of those replying to the public consultation were in favour (48 out of 68) of having
more information about other legal forms than limited liability companies centrally at EU
level (through BRIS), and 37 and 36 out of those mentioned cooperatives and partnerships
respectively. 115 out of 117 of SMEs responding to the SME panel were in favour of
having more information about
partnerships
at EU level. 90% of public authorities and
91% of legal practitioners, 72% of companies and 70% of business registers responding to
the supporting study surveys thought that having information about partnerships at EU
level would be beneficial.
The respondents to the public consultation overall considered that similar information
should be made available as is currently the case for limited liability companies. Some
respondents said that information about all types of companies should be available,
referring also to associations, trusts or foundations. In consultation activities in CLEG,
most Member States’ representatives (business registers) also considered more
transparency on partnerships beneficial (some pointing out that otherwise these company
types could be used for abuse and fraud). Furthermore, in the consultations in CLEG, some
Member States referred to the need for harmonised data in this respect and saw some
challenges. Company law professors and practitioners in ICLEG recommended that
information in the national registers of the Member States about unlimited and limited
partnerships, and at least their partners with unlimited liability should be made available via
BRIS, on the basis of some harmonisation.
Nearly all responding participants to the public consultation (90%) thought that the
information about
third country branches in the EU,
which is already available in
national business registers, should also be accessible centrally through BRIS (60 out of
67). This majority support was reflected across the different stakeholder groups. High
support was also expressed in the supporting study surveys, with 73% of all respondents,
and in particular 94% of public authorities and 81% of legal practitioners confirming that
having this information at EU level would be beneficial.
61
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
The majority of stakeholders thought that it is important to have
better access to company
information related to groups of companies.
Over three quarters of respondents to the
public consultation (77%) was of this opinion (51 out of 66). Some business associations
considered access to cross-border information on groups important, highlighting though
that this should not lead to further requirements for companies. 111 out of 113 SMEs
responding to the SME panel also considered that such information would be beneficial.
An EU level SME association listed information related to groups among their four
priorities regarding company information that should be available not only at national but
also at cross-border level and stressed that this information is indeed difficult to access and
compare, which represents additional time and financial costs for SMEs. 76% of the
respondents to the supporting study surveys respondents, and in particular, 83% public
authorities, 75% companies and 72% legal practitioners also indicated that it would be
beneficial if information about groups of companies was available in an easily accessible
way and format to the wider public in both the national business registers and through
BRIS. 78% of all respondents to the supporting study surveys said that having the group
information available at EU level would help to reduce administrative burden (82% of
legal practitioners, 82% of public authorities and 75% of companies).
It was generally considered across the consultation activities that access to information
about groups would enhance transparency and trust in the business environment and would
make it easier to search for business partners. The majority of public authorities considered
that it would be beneficial to have access to information on groups. Business/financial
organisations and companies held mixed opinions but generally anticipated benefits if
information on groups were to be made publicly available. Legal professionals cautioned
that group information is different in the Member States, which might limit the value of
having cross-border access to this information. Some Member States considered that
implementation of such requirements might be challenging as group information might be
extensive and some underlined that this information was not yet available in their national
business register. Company law professors in ICLEG considered that it is important for any
company’s stakeholder to have access to information on the group’s existence and
structure.
In terms of purposes for which group-related data is used by the stakeholders, 94% of the
public authorities (mostly in charge of tax issues) consulted in the context of the supporting
study indicated that they use company data for taxation purposes and 50% - for anti-money
laundering purposes. Other uses included e.g. the supervision of internal transfers of posted
workers in company groups. 80% of legal professionals indicated that they use such
information mainly for anti-money laundering purposes, 70% for verification of company
data of a business partner of a company and 70% for preparation of contracts. Companies
and business organisations needed group information for taxation, application for funding
and anti-money laundering purposes.
67% of respondents in the public consultation were in favour of EU company law rules
requiring
disclosure of additional information about limited liability companies
in
national business registers and via BRIS (40 out of 60). There were majorities in favour
among the responding companies, legal professionals and EU citizens whereas the views
were more mixed among business associations and public authorities with approximately
equal numbers of respondents in favour and against.
The supporting study surveys also showed that stakeholders, notably public authorities and
legal practitioners, need to have access information about the place of management and the
place of the main economic activity. In particular, tax authorities responding to the
62
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
supporting study surveys needed this information for the identification and detection of
fraud and tax evasion (95% of tax authorities in case of place of management and 89% - in
case of place of economic activity), and the responding legal practitioners - for taxation
purposes (55% of legal practitioners use place of management and 73% - place of
economic activities). Legal practitioners also needed the place of economic activity for
social security purposes (55%). There was support to have this information at EU level
across the consultation activities. 70% of respondents to the public consultation thought
that the
place of management
and 67% - that the
place of main economic activity
of EU
limited liability companies should be disclosed in business registers and made available
through BRIS (45 and 43 respondents out of 64, respectively), while 25% replied that this
should not be the case. A responding EU level SME association listed place of
management as one of their four priorities regarding company information that should be
made available at national and EU level. Many stakeholders replying to the supporting
study surveys said that having this information available would help to reduce
administrative (72% of all stakeholders, 95% of public authorities in case of place of
management, and 81% legal practitioners and 66% of companies in case of place of
management, and 73% of all stakeholders, 95% of public authorities, 72% legal
practitioners and 69% of companies in case of the place of the main economic activity).
SMEs also supported disclosure of such information: 109 of 114 SMEs responding to the
SME panel were in favour of making information about place of management available,
and 112 out of 113 – about place of economic activity. In the supporting study surveys,
majorities in particular among legal practitioners and authorities considered that the
availability of such information would enhance trust in the business environment. The
reasons mentioned during consultation activities in favour of such disclosure included
taxation, insolvency/restructuring and social security purposes (mainly mentioned by
authorities and legal professionals) as well as fight against letterbox companies. Notaries
pointed out that while information on place of management and the place of main
economic activity will provide more transparency and prevent misuse of company law,
these concepts of are not harmonised under EU law, which might mislead users and create
legal uncertainty. Some Member States in the consultations pointed out that these concepts
are not part of their legal systems and that they would need to be defined.
A majority of stakeholders (in particular authorities, business registers and legal
professionals) considered that it would be useful to
link BRIS with the EU
interconnection of beneficial ownership registers and the EU interconnection of
insolvency registers.
Stakeholders were less supportive of connecting BRIS with the EU
interconnection of land registers.
A majority of respondents to the public consultation (82% and 72%) thought that it would
be useful to
link BRIS with the EU interconnection of beneficial ownership registers
(58 out of 71)
and the EU interconnection of insolvency registers
(51 out of 71). 41%
thought it useful to connect BRIS with the EU interconnection of land registers. Some
stakeholders, in particular notaries, expressed doubts about such interconnection due to
different subject matter of both systems and privacy restrictions to access information in
land registers. In the discussions in CLEG, most Member State experts have also
considered interconnection of BRIS with other systems beneficial. Some Member States
highlighted the importance of ensuring compliance with personal data protection rules. In
the surveys for the supporting study, 67% of all respondents said that it would be useful to
a large or very large extent to link BRIS to BORIS (74% of business registers, 90% of
legal practitioners, 69% of public authorities, 61% of companies) and 66% - to link BRIS
63
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0068.png
to IRI (70% of business registers, 80% of legal practitioners, 70% of public authorities,
61% of companies).
83% of respondents to the public consultation asked for more
search functionalities
centrally at EU level via BRIS (50 out of 60), in particular on searching by legal form (e.g.
by European Companies, SEs) and by registered office, but also by country-by-country
reports. 113 out of 115 SMEs responding to the SME panel also considered this beneficial.
The survey for the supporting study also confirmed that stakeholders considered that
limited search functionality of both the business registers and BRIS caused difficulties, as
some Member States limit searches to very limited time-frames or number of possible hits.
2. Use of company data in cross-border situations
Ensuring adequate verification of company data before it is entered into
the business register (policy options 3)
Enabling direct use of company data from business registers in cross-
border situations (policy options 4)
In the consultation activities, many stakeholders highlighted the importance of reliable
company data and confirmed that introducing common rules for verification of company
data before it is entered into business registers would increase its reliability. Around 40%
of public authorities, a third of legal practitioners, a quarter of companies and of business
registers responding to the supporting study surveys saw increased legal certainty as the
main benefit from the measures enabling the use of company information in cross-border
administrative or court procedures (which in those survey also included introducing the ex-
ante checks). The assessment by company law professors in ICLEG also confirmed that
harmonising the requirements for ex-ante verification is the appropriate measure to
increase reliability of company data
149
.
The importance of adequate checks for ensuring the reliability of company data in business
registers was in general underlined by legal professionals, in particular notaries, in the
public consultation and targeted interviews. Notaries considered that, today, at the cross-
border level, in many cases company information may be unreliable, and, eventually, it
might have no legal value. Business registers, can only fulfil their function of providing
transparency and legal certainty for business transactions if the company information
entered in reliable business registers is complete, correct and easily accessible. Notaries
also considered that the information in business registers is only correct and reliable if
register courts and/or notaries as public officials check the legal validity of corporate
transactions and decisions, verify the relevant company data and securely identify the
parties and applicants. Notaries also were of the opinion, that it should be up to the
Member States to decide whether the standard of input control in another Member State
satisfies its verification standards, i.e. whether it can be deemed equivalent to an own
standard of input control. Finally, notaries were of the view that Member States should
have discretion as to whether and how to design a system of preventive control that is in
line with their legal traditions.
149
Commission expert group consisting of company law professors (ICLEG) proposed to consider rules for
verification and checking of company data at EU level to further improve the reliability of registers in their
paper on the cross-border use of company data.
64
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
Many of the stakeholders during the consultation activities also considered that defining
common minimum rules for the verification of the correctness of company data before it is
entered in a business register could facilitate its use when dealing with competent
authorities or in court proceedings in another Member State. Defining common minimum
rules for ex-ante check was the second most important means to facilitate the cross-border
use of company data according to 43% of respondents to the public consultation (62%, 36
respondents). Companies replying to the surveys for the supporting study held mixed
views, although more companies still expected rather a decrease in administrative costs
(35%) than an increase (28%).
The majority of stakeholders considered that ensuring consistent ex-ante scrutiny through
the introduction of minimum common standards for checking the company information
before entering it into the business register would lead to a decrease in administrative costs
and charges or would not have an impact at all, with only some adjustment costs expected
by business registers. In the surveys for the supporting study, 27% of the responding
registers expected a small (and 14% a significant) increase in administrative costs for
introducing minimum common standards; in the workshop, 10 registers anticipated a slight
rise in administrative costs but participants said that benefits will outweigh the
administrative costs. 50% of business registers responding to the surveys for the supporting
study indicate that introducing common ex-ante checks would lead to a significant or small
increase in adjustment costs, with 10% expecting significant or small decreases, and 18% -
no impact.
In general, stakeholders in the consultation activities considered it important to remove
unjustified barriers and obstacles to the use of company information in cross-border
situations.
The results of consultation activities gave an example of how many companies try to set up
cross-border subsidiaries or branches. 13% of SMEs (mainly private and public limited
liability companies) replying to the SME panel already had an establishment/place of
business in another Member State (19 out of 151), 9% were planning to have one (14)
whereas 5% tried but gave up (7). Similarly, 20% of companies responding to the survey
for the supporting study indicated that they had or were considering setting up a subsidiary
in another Member State. 13% already had or were considering setting up a cross-border
branch.
As to specific difficulties when setting up cross-border subsidiaries or branches, the
consultation activities show that in a big majority of Member States, companies need to
resubmit data, which exists in their national business registers, to the registers of other
Member States. In particular in the public consultation, companies, which faced difficulties
when setting up branches or subsidiaries, indicated that the main problems concerned the
need to provide a certified translation of company documents or information, followed by
the need to have company documents legalised/have an apostille, and by a time-consuming
procedure and administrative costs . This was confirmed by the results of the SME panel,
where the responding SMEs with experience of setting up establishments abroad
mentioned that documents had to be legalised to be valid in another Member State
(apostille) (20 out of 40), that certified/sworn translation was needed (19) and that they
could not use the information/documents from their company’s business register (non-
recognition) (13). 60% of those answering faced administrative costs or time-consuming
procedures linked to such difficulties (15 out of 25); and costs for legal advice (e.g. from
lawyers or notaries), translations, legalisation costs were mentioned by a few respondents
in this context. The need for legalisation of documents and certified translations when
65
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0070.png
setting up branches for companies, and to a lesser extent when setting up subsidiaries, was
also mentioned by nearly half of the legal practitioners replying to the survey for the
supporting study. The existence of administrative barriers, and examples of the resulting
administrative burden (time, legal cost and fees) for companies was confirmed by the
targeted interviews with practicing lawyers specialised in company law.
Furthermore, the public consultation confirmed that companies face difficulties or find it
impossible to use the information, which is already in their national business register, when
dealing with competent authorities or in court proceedings in another Member State. A
majority (73%) of companies who replied indicated that they have encountered such
difficulties. Similarly, 70% of responding authorities confirmed they faced difficulties
when accessing or verifying data about companies from business registers in another
Member State. The report by ICLEG also mentioned that the company data in the business
register of one Member State is often not accepted as evidence in other Member State,
probably due to the perceived risk of inaccuracy of the registered information from another
Member State; instead, they require additional evidence, which generates costs and delays
for the parties relying on the registered information
150
. The main difficulties encountered
by the respondents to the public consultation were that certified translation of company
documents/information was required and that company documents had to be legalised/have
an apostille. Similarly, 33% of SMEs responding to the SME panel with cross-border
experience, needed certified translations when dealing with authorities in other Member
States (9 out of 40) and 22% - legal certification (apostille) (6). 64% of those answering to
this question faced administrative costs or time consuming procedures linked to such
difficulties (14 out of 22). Over half of those who were involved in cross-border court
proceedings needed certified/sworn translation of company information/documents (9 out
of 17).
The surveys for the supporting study also showed that more than half of the legal
practitioners consulted needed certified or sworn translations of documents (64%) and
certification of documents (55%), and 45% mentioned the need for authentication
(apostille) in administrative procedures and in court proceedings. Similarly, more than half
of public authorities required certified or sworn translations of documents (53%), 41% -
certification of documents and around 30% of public authorities mentioned the need for
authentication (apostille). Furthermore, 60% of the legal practitioners surveyed indicated
that they face difficulties dealing with company law procedures due to differences in
electronic formats required by authorities and courts, and 50% due to requirements from
business registers.
Stakeholders in general expressed support in the consultation activities to the planned
measures to facilitate the cross-border use of company data. For instance as regards the
application of the once-only principle,
a majority of the SMEs (mainly private and public
limited liability companies) responding to the SME panel thought that not having to
resubmit the information already available in their company’s business register would help
their company when setting up cross-border subsidiaries and branches (65 out of 70).
Around three-quarters of replying stakeholders to the public consultation also thought that
applying the once-only principle would help when setting up subsidiaries (70%, 35
respondents) and branches (78%, 39 respondents) cross-border. Companies replying to the
150
ICLEG paper on the use of company data (to be published on the Commission company law policy
website and in the Register of expert groups once finalised).
66
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
supporting study surveys saw an easier cross-border expansion of SMEs as the first benefit
of the application of the once-only-principle (22% of replying companies).
Furthermore, 68 out of 75 of SMEs responding to the SME panel thought that having
less
formalities
(for example, through the use of digital solutions applied by authorities thus
reducing the need of legal certification of company data in procedures) would help their
company. Similarly, respondents thought that introducing a
common digital company
information extract
would help (64 out of 72). 59% respondents to the public
consultation also thought that replacing the need for legalisation/apostille, e.g. by secure
digital transmission channel would facilitate the use of company data cross-border (34).
Consultations with practising lawyers specialised in company law confirmed that the
application of once-only principle, and the abolishment of formalities when using cross-
border company data would reduce costs and time needed for procedures. Lawyers
provided examples from their daily practice on difficulties and costs and time spent with
procedures. The common harmonised company extract was also supported by notaries,
legal professionals and also by company professors in ICLEG. Many Member States were
in general supportive of common company extract. Some mentioned that it should focus on
basic company information and build on the existing register data. Most of Member States
delegations were also open to the use of the once-only principle.
Section 2: Analysis of results – Other issues raised during consultation activities
The initial consultations, in particular public consultation also include questions related to
on-line formation of other companies than limited liability companies as well as about so
called “virtual office”.
In the public consultations, about three quarters (72%) of those who replied (42 out of 58
respondents) think that it should be possible to allow fully online formation and filing for
companies other than limited liability companies (e.g. partnerships) with the remaining
28% disagreeing. Some stakeholders considered that online formation of partnerships
should only be introduced at EU level if experience with online formation of limited
liability companies is available. In the discussions in CLEG, Member States were divided
if introduction of online formation and filing for partnerships is necessary at stage.
In the public consultation, a majority of those who replied think that
virtual registered
offices
could serve real business needs (31 out of 49), while 41 % have no opinion or gave
no answer. 57% of respondents had no opinion or gave no answer to whether the
use of
virtual registered offices is widespread/growing (47
respondents out of 83). Amongst
those who answered, 61% experienced the use to be widespread/growing opposed to 39%
did not consider this happening (22 respondents out of 36). Close to half of those replying
to this question viewed the
overall impact of companies using virtual registered offices
as negative (45%, 17 out of 38), 34% (13 out of 38) as positive and 21% (8 out of 38) as
neutral. More than half of overall respondents had no opinion or gave no answer. As
regards
what issues the use of virtual registered offices raises,
answers varied.
Generally, respondents highlighted that virtual offices might facilitate the operation of
shell companies, fraudulent behaviour and money-laundering, and might raise questions of
applicable law and serving of official documents. In turn, some respondents considered
that the use of virtual offices could have an overall positive impact reducing overheads for
small companies and start-ups. When asked whether there is a
need for any action to
address the use of virtual registered offices,
around half of those who answered (24 out
of 45) see a need for action at EU level, 29% sees a need for action at national level and
67
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
18% does not see a need for action at all. 46% had no opinion or gave no answer (38 out of
83).
In general in the consultations, it deemed to be difficult to define the concept of virtual
registered offices and stakeholders had in general mixed views, including in the CLEG
discussions.
Section 3: Feedback on the Inception Impact Assessment
Stakeholders who provided feedback to the inception impact assessment expressed support
for the further digitalisation of EU company law, pointing out that the COVID-19
pandemic has showed how digital tools are essential to ensure the continuity of business
operations and interactions with authorities on company law related issues. Stakeholders
considered that EU level action is needed.
Enhancing transparency of company data and facilitating the cross-border use of company
information was supported. Stakeholders, in particular business registers, agreed with the
problem definition and confirmed the need to tackle the identified issues. BRIS was
considered as a good platform that should be further developed to facilitate cross-border
use of company data. Business associations particularly supported further digitalisation of
company law procedures. Furthermore, they highlighted the importance of ensuring the
recognition of documents/information issued by business registers, including the
acceptability of electronic copies and the application of the once-only principle. Some
submissions proposed that various digital tools and methods be considered in the future
initiative.
68
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
A
NNEX
3: W
HO IS AFFECTED AND HOW
?
1.
P
RACTICAL IMPLICATIONS OF THE INITIATIVE
Businesses
would be positively affected by the initiative. By making more important
company data publicly available in business registers and at EU level through BRIS and
improving its reliability, will reduce overall administrative burden on companies and in
turn facilitate access to finance and the creation of businesses. In addition, the facilitation
of the cross-border use of such data, when creating new subsidiaries or branches cross-
border or in other cross-border situations, including administrative or court procedures,
will result in important recurrent cost savings and thus will substantially ease conducting
cross-border business activities and facilitate access to other Member States’ markets.
These measures will apply to around 16 million limited liability companies and 2 million
partnerships in the EU.
The package will result in some implementation costs for certain companies. These costs
will only apply to companies, which currently do not file information to the business
register. These one-off costs are estimated to amount to around EUR 311 million. On the
other hand, companies which are or are planning to engage in cross-border business
activities and/or creating new cross-border subsidiaries or branches, will benefit from
recurrent annual savings (burden reduction) of around EUR 437 million per year. When
comparing the one-off cost (around 311 million) against recurrent annual savings for
companies (around 437 million per year), it is clear that the
benefits
much outweigh the
one-off costs and that the initiative will bring significant burden reduction for companies in
the Single Market.
Business registers
will be expected to overall benefit from the measures. The increased
accessibility and reliability of company data, and better connections between registers,
thanks to the once-only principle and also interconnecting other EU level systems/registers
to BRIS, should facilitate registers’ work. On the side of costs, the package is expected to
entail one-off costs for business registers to adapt the IT systems of around EUR 5.4
million one-off cost, and recurrent costs e.g. to carry out ex-ante verification of company
data, estimated at around EUR 4 million per year for all business registers. In this context,
some business registers expected increases in adjustment costs to be limited as ex-ante
checks were already in place. It is also likely that there will be some loss of revenue e.g.
for those business registers, which charge access fees for company extracts. However the
application of the once-only principle and the common extract would bring more benefits
than costs
Other public authorities
would also be able to consult the company information directly
from business registers. Easier access to more sets of information would in particular
facilitate the work of authorities, for example in fight fraud and abuse. The application of
once-only principle would result in burden reduction also for public authorities. On the
other hand, those public authorities in charge of issuing apostille will face loss of revenue,
which are estimated to amount to EUR 9.5 million per year. However, due to current
unclear rules and legal uncertainty and the related human resources and time needed to
issue an apostille, the abolishing of the apostille is estimated to result in overall
administrative burden reduction.
69
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0074.png
Citizens/consumers
will benefit from easier access to reliable company data. Society at
large will benefit from the initiative as it will facilitate the fight against fraud and abuse
and will promote digital tools.
2.
S
UMMARY OF COSTS AND BENEFITS
I. Overview of Benefits (total for all provisions) – Preferred Option
Description
Amount
Direct benefits
Comments
Trust and transparency in the
No quantified estimates available. Businesses, See detailed description and motivation in
market
business registers, public authorities, legal Annex 4 on the sections on efficiency,
professionals, and society at large will benefit (benefits under “Trust and transparency in
from more transparency. Having more reliable the market”.)
company data in business registers will bring
more trust and more legal certainty in the
market.
Ease of doing business
Companies will find more
multilingual (harmonised)
business partners, potential
Member States through
transparency.
easily, comparable,
information about
clients etc. in other
the measures on
See detailed description and motivation in
Annex 4 on the sections on efficiency
(benefits under “Ease of doing business and
access to the market”.)
EUR 437 million recurrent cost savings per year
for companies is expected from the measures
that enable direct use of company data from
business registers in cross-border situations
Savings in operational costs No quantified estimates available. Business
for business registers
registers will benefit from increased company
data in BRIS and from the interconnections with
different systems. Adequate verification of
company data will result receiving/being able to
access more reliable data from other registers.
This will facilitate their work. The use of the
once-only principle will allow business registers
to receive the documents directly from other
registers which will result in more streamlined
processes and cost savings.
Savings in operational costs No quantified estimates available. Public
for public authorities
authorities will benefit from more company data
comparable and easily accessible cross-border.
Enable direct use of reliable company data from
business registers in cross-border situations will
streamline procedures which will lead to cost
savings
Indirect benefits
Fight against fraud
More transparency and easier use of verified
company data in cross-border situations will
facilitate the work of public authorities fighting
fraud and abuse.
See detailed description and motivation in
Annex 4 on the sections on efficiency
(benefits under “Fight against fraud and
abuse”.)
See detailed description and motivation in
Annex 4 on the sections on efficiency
(benefits under “Operational cost savings
for business registers”.)
See detailed description and motivation in
Annex 4 on the sections on efficiency
(benefits under “Operational cost savings
for public authorities”.)
Digital company
More
transparency,
interconnection
of See detailed description and motivation in
information systems and the application of the Annex 4 on the sections on efficiency
once-only principle will have a strong impact on (benefits under “Digital economy”.)
digitalisation.
70
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0075.png
Functioning of the internal More transparency and more reliable company
market
data that can be used directly in cross-border
situations will contribute to the creation of a
more integrated and digitalised Single Market
See detailed description and motivation in
Annex 4 on the sections on efficiency
(benefits under “Functioning of the internal
market”.)
Administrative cost savings related to the ‘one in, one out’ approach*
Administrative burden
EUR 437 million cost savings per year recurrent
reduction for companies
(recurrent) for companies is expected from the
measures that enable direct use of company data
from business registers in cross-border situations
II. Overview of costs – Preferred option
151
Citizens/Consumers
Businesses
Administrations (business
registers and other public
authorities)
One-off
EUR
2.7
million
IT
development
cost
for
-
business
registers
(€
100.000 per
MS)
-
-
-
2 FTEs per
MS – 54
FTE
altogether
per year for
business
registers.
EUR
4
million per
year.
Loss
of
revenue of
EUR
7.9
million per
year
Recurrent
One-off
Recurrent
One-off
Recurrent
Direct adjustment
-
costs
Policy
option 1c
Direct
administrative
costs
Policy
option
3b
Direct
adjustment costs
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EUR
million
-
311
-
-
Policy
option
4c
Direct
adjustment costs
-
-
-
-
EUR
2.7
million
IT
development
cost
(100.000 per
MS)
-
Direct
administrative
costs
-
-
-
-
Loss
of
revenue of
EUR
9.5
million per
year
Costs related to the ‘one in, one out’ approach
151
See details and explanations in Annex 4.
71
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0076.png
Administrative
costs (for
offsetting)
-
-
EUR
million
off)
311
(one
3.
R
ELEVANT SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS
III. Overview of relevant Sustainable Development Goals – Preferred Option(s)
Relevant SDG
Expected progress towards the Goal
Comments
SDG8 decent work
economic growth
and This initiative will contribute indirectly to
economic growth as it will enhance the business
environment in the Single Market
72
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0077.png
A
NNEX
4: A
NALYTICAL METHODS
1.
S
CREENING OF IMPACTS
1.1. I
DENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS
All the impacts, which could potentially be associated with the policy options analysed in
this Impact Assessment were identified. This was done on the basis of the “impacts
checklist” set out in the ‘Better Regulation Guidelines’ (Tool #18), taking into account the
evidence gathered in the supporting study, during consultation activities with stakeholders
and on expert assessment.
The positive and negative, direct and indirect, intended and unintended, and short- and
long-term impacts were considered. Table 1 shows potential relevant impacts, which were
kept to further analyse their relevance for the planned initiative.
Table 1.
‘Long list’ of impacts
Long list of impacts drawing on
Commission IA guidelines
Conduct of business
Position of SMEs
Sectoral competitiveness, trade,
and investment flows
Administrative burdens on
business
Functioning of the internal market
and competition
Public authorities (and budgets)
Social Impacts
Working conditions, job standards
and quality
Public health & safety and health
systems
Culture
Governance, participation, and
good administration
Potential relevant impacts
considered
Conduct of business
Position of SMEs
Sectoral competitiveness, trade,
and investment flows
Administrative
burdens
on
business
Functioning of the internal market
and competition
Public authorities (and budgets)
Impact type
Economic
Impacts
Governance, participation,
good administration
and
Environmental
impacts
Economic and
Social impacts
Climate
Environmental impacts
Quality of natural resources
(water, soil, air etc.)
Biodiversity, including flora,
fauna, ecosystems, and landscapes
Animal welfare
Employment
Income distribution, social
protection, and social inclusion (of
particular groups)
Technological development /
Technological development /
73
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0078.png
digital economy
Consumers and households
Capital movements; financial
markets; stability of the euro
Property rights; intellectual
property rights
Economic and
Environmental
impacts
Sustainable consumption and
production
Efficient use of resources
(renewable & non-renewable)
Land use
The likelihood or scale of
environmental risks
digital economy
Overarching
Impacts
Territorial impacts (specific (types
of) regions and sectors)
Innovation (productivity and
resource efficiency); research
(academic and industrial)
Fraud, crime, terrorism, and
Fraud, crime, terrorism, and
security, including hybrid threats
security, including hybrid threats
Resilience, technological
sovereignty, open strategic
autonomy, security of supply
Transport and the use of energy
Food safety, food security and
nutrition
Waste production, generation, and
recycling
Third countries, developing
countries, and international
relations
Sustainable development
Fundamental rights
Fundamental rights
1.2. S
CREENING OF IMPACTS
The following issues were taken into account when analysing the significance of impacts,
which can be associated with the policy options in this IA, for different stakeholders:
Their expected magnitude – taking into account the likely scale of impacts (i.e.,
the extent of expected costs and benefits), the number of companies affected, and
the extent of change expected;
Their likelihood – taking into account how likely it is for the positive and negative
impacts to occur, and prioritising those for which there is robust evidence;
Their relevance to stakeholders – taking into account views provided by relevant
stakeholder groups during consultation activities; and
74
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
Their link to Commission objectives, i.e., the extent to which each impact is
aligned with the objectives of the initiative (to include all impacts that directly
link to the objectives).
The assessment takes into account the views of stakeholders gathered through extensive
consultation activities (public consultation, SME panel, surveys for the supporting study,
targeted consultations with Member State company law experts, business associations,
legal practitioners), academic papers by company law professors as well as evidence
collected through desk research.
Some of the screened impacts are strongly interlinked and therefore, are covered jointly as
it would be impossible to separately assess their impact.
Table 2 presents the expected magnitude, likelihood and relevance for stakeholders for all
potentially relevant impacts, with additional explanation and marks which of those impacts
were retained for detailed analysis.
75
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0080.png
Upgrading digital company law
Table 2.
Significance of impacts for all the policy options under consideration
Key: ‘●’ low; ‘●●’ moderate; ‘●●●’ high
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Comment
Retained
()
Economic impacts
The ease of doing business refers to how easy or
difficult it is to start or operate a business in a
cross-border setting, e.g. by setting up a subsidiary
or a branch in another Member State, or carry out
commercial activities in another Member State. In
the EU context it is tightly related to the access to
the market and the (lack of) administrative or
financial barriers that could hamper cross-border
business activities. Under this impact category, the
conduct of businesses, position of the SME
and
the
sectoral competitiveness, trade, and
investment flows
will be jointly covered and
analysed given that they are strongly interlinked
and assessing their separate impact would be
impossible.
The
conduct of businesses
discusses whether the
regulation is likely to impose additional costs for
the businesses that might impact the creation or
closing down of businesses, as well as the access
to finance. It is expected that this initiative will
create cost savings for companies as access to
Conduct of
businesses
(hereafter: the ease of
●●
doing business and
access to the market)
●●●
●●●
76
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0081.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
more reliable company data will be more widely
available, which in turn will potentially facilitate
access to finance and the creation of businesses. In
addition, the facilitation of the cross-border use of
such data, when setting up subsidiaries or branches
cross-border or in other cross-border situations,
including administrative or court procedures, will
also result in cost savings. These cost savings are
captured under the administrative burden below.
As the
SMEs
account for around 98-99% of
limited liability companies
152
in the EU, the new
initiative will have an impact on their position, in
particular of those SMEs that engage (or plan to
engage) in cross-border activities and operations.
The planned initiative, same as the already existing
EU company law
acquis,
does not make a
distinction between SMEs and larger companies.
All companies, including SMEs, will fall under its
scope of application and will be covered by its
provisions, including e.g. a few additional
disclosure requirements. However, the easier
access to company data and the removal of
Retained
()
152
The study 'Assessment and quantification of drivers, problems and impacts related to cross-border transfers of registered offices and cross-border divisions of companies'
EY 2017
77
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0082.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
administrative (and financial) barriers for its cross-
border use will be in particular beneficial to SMEs
as they do not have the financial and
administrative resources of large companies.
Sectoral competitiveness, trade, and investment
flows
refers to impact on the cross-border trade
and services and on the investment flows cross
border given that the trust in the market can be
increased as well as cross border company
formation can be stimulated. The initiative will
allow businesses to benefit from the Single Market
as it will be easier to use company data when
setting up cross-border subsidiaries and branches
and in other cross-border operations and activities.
Again, the conduct of businesses, the position of
the SME and the investment flows and trade
cannot be assessed separately in this context.
Therefore, the three categories are jointly
examined in an impact called ‘ease of doing
business and access to the market’.
Retained
()
Conduct of business
Position of SMEs
●●
●●
●●●
●●
●●●
●●●
See above
See above
78
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0083.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
Retained
()
Sectoral
competitiveness, trade,
and investment flows
●●
●●
See above
●●●
●●
●●
Trust and transparency
in the market
The initiative will impact the trust that companies
have in the market and in potential business
partners in other Member States as it will be easier
for them to find this information. At the same time,
public authorities, legal practitioners, consumers,
creditors, and other stakeholders, including society
at large, will have more trust in the market thanks
to the increased availability of more reliable
company data. Furthermore, the ex-ante controls
will improve the trust in the quality of the
company data even further.
The initiative will impact the administrative
burdens of businesses in multiple ways. First, it
will create some information obligations for
companies (e.g. regarding belonging to a group,
place of management) Secondly, it will – through
the application of the only-once principle - reduce
administrative burden on companies when they set
●●
Administrative
burdens on business
●●
●●●
79
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0084.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
up subsidiaries of branches cross-border, and will
also reduce burdens when companies use company
data in cross-border situations (e.g. in
administrative or court procedures) by introducing
a common company extract and reducing
formalities.
This initiative will ensure that the company
information in all business registers is accurate,
adequate and up-to-date which means that
companies will need to comply e.g. with deadlines
for filing. Companies will only face enforcement
costs in case of non-compliance with rules.
However, it is impossible to predict whether the
non-compliance will increase or go down as a
result of the policy options. Given that the overall
assessment is that the change in enforcement
would be limited (in both positive or negative
terms), the expert assessment is that this impact
should not be retained as such.
Due to the improvement of quality and reliability
of company data, the sharing of information
between business registers and searching for
information about companies in other Member
States will become more efficient after the
adjustment period. This will result in operational
cost savings for business registers.
Retained
()
Enforcement
businesses
costs
Savings related to
operational costs for
business registers and
for
other
public
authorities
80
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0085.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
●●
●●
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
Retained
()
The improvement of quality and reliability of
company data should also result in some
operational cost savings for public authorities, e.g.
tax, labour authorities, or courts which need data
about companies for tasks related to administrative
and judicial procedures but also to more easily
identify companies (including taking more
effective action against fraudulent or abusive
ones).
The initiative will create additional costs for
business registers: the additional disclosure
requirements and the application of once-only
principle will require some IT developments, rules
on ex-ante scrutiny could require some additional
staff in the Member States (labour costs) and there
could be some lost revenue from company
extracts.
As regards other public authorities, and in
particular those in charge of issuing apostille, there
could be some lost revenue given that this
initiative will abolish formalities such as apostille.
●●
●●
●●●
Adjustment
costs:
business registers and
other public authorities
Enforcement costs for
business registers
The initiative will ensure that the company in the
business registers will be more reliable in order to
create trust between Member States. In some
Member States, business registers may face extra
81
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0086.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
enforcement costs of additional measures. This is
only relevant for policy options 3 and not
applicable to other options.
Retained
()
Social Impacts
The initiative implements eGoverment principles
as it aims to provide digital tools for business
registers and other authorities. In some Member
States, the responsibilities of business registers
will be affected (ex-ante control). The public will
have enhanced access to more transparent and
more reliable company information. The initiative
is linked to the application of the once only
principle (good administration).
The benefits of the good administration are
included in the reduction of administrative burden,
the ease of doing business and the transparency
and trust in the market. Therefore, to avoid overlap
(and to avoid double counting benefits) this impact
is not assessed separately.
Environmental
Impacts
The initiative could have some positive
environmental impacts due to increased possibility
to use digital procedures and tools between
business registers and companies, and also
between business registers in different Member
States through BRIS, and an increased application
Governance,
participation, and good
administration
82
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0087.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
of the once-only principle. This would mean e.g.
reducing the use of paper. However, the expected
magnitude would be small and the likelihood is
uncertain. Therefore, this impact is not retained.
Retained
()
Economic and social
impacts
●●
Due to a reduction of administrative burden and
the reduction of hassle (increasing the ease of
doing business) this initiative could impact cross-
border investments, trade and services, and
subsequently indirectly impact employment (due
to increased investment) as well. However, the size
and magnitude of these impacts would be difficult
to assess. Therefore, the impact that is retained in
‘ease of doing business and access to the market’
is the investment across borders.
Downstream it will also be the case that consumers
will have better access to company information
and thus will be in a position to make better
informed decision and reduce potential consumer
detriment. However, this is not the retained as a
specific impact but it is included in the increased
trust in the market. Consumers have more and
more reliable information about companies which
helps them take informed decision when buying or
Employment
Consumers and
households
●●
83
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0088.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
contracting with companies from other Member
States.
Retained
()
●●
●●
●●●
Digital economy
This initiative focusses on simplifying
(digitalising) procedures for cross border business
activities (i.e. setting up branches, subsidiaries and
other cross-border operations/activities). This
initiative also generates opportunities for other
administrations and/or courts to directly use the
company data in cross-border situations. It will
include the application of the once only principle
in cross-border situations. This initiative also
focusses on the reduction of burden and costs for
businesses through the use of digital technology
and the application of the once only principle.
Overarching
impacts
Fight against fraud
and abuse
●●
●●
Increased availability and access to cross-border
company data together with more reliable
company data (as a result of an improved ex-ante
quality control) will facilitate the work of
authorities and lead to better results when
fighting abuse and fraud.
The initiative will facilitate the implementation of
the rights of establishment in any MS, as
prescribed by Article 15(2) of the Charter. There
Fundamental rights
84
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0089.png
Upgrading digital company law
Impact type
Expected
magnitude
Relevance
for
Likelihood
stakeholder
s
Link with
the
objectives
()
Comment
should be positive impact on companies
benefiting from the opportunities offered by the
Single Market, in particular concerning the
freedom to conduct business set out in Article 16
of the Charter. The key obstacles to cross-border
operation should be removed (at least for SMEs).
However, these impacts are assessed under the
Functioning Internal Market and in particular
under Transparency and trust in the market and
ease of doing business and access to the market.
In addition, the retained measures (proposed
solutions) need to respect the protection of
personal data in line with Article 8 of the Charter.
However, this initiative does not have an impact
on fundamental rights as such. Therefore, this
impact is not retained.
Retained
()
●●
Functioning of the
internal market
●●●
●●●
The free movement of goods, services, capital,
will be easier as businesses can extend their
operations cross-border with less administrative
burden. Easier cross-border setting up and
activities for companies can lead to more
employment.
85
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0090.png
Table 3.
Selected significant impacts
Stakeholders
One-off (O) / Recurrent
(R)
R
R
Reduction R
Increase O
O/R
R
R
R
R
Other public authorities
(tax, labour, courts)
Main category of impacts
Companies
Society i.e. other
stakeholders such as
consumers
Business registers
Trust and transparency in the market,
for all stakeholders but in particular for
companies (benefit)
Ease of doing business and access to
the market (including competitiveness,
trade) (benefit)
Reduction and increase in
administrative burdens on companies
(cost and benefit)
Adjustment costs for business registers
and other public authorities (cost)
Enforcement costs for business
registers
Savings related to operational costs for
business registers and other public
authorities (benefit)
Digital economy (benefit)
Fight against fraud and abuse (benefit)
Functioning of the internal market
(benefit)

 

 

 
Full

 
Full

 
 




 
 
 
86
Quantitative
Qualitative
rr
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0091.png
2.
A
SSESSING THE POLICY OPTIONS
This section includes an assessment of every policy options in comparison to Policy Option 0
(the baseline). Each policy option is evaluated on its
effectiveness (section 1), efficiency
(section 2) and coherence (section 3).
2.1. M
ETHODOLOGICAL APPROACH
2.1.1 General methodological approach
The assessment of the policy options is based on a mixed methods approach in which the
effectiveness, efficiency and coherence of the policy options are graded on a scoring system
that comprises qualitative, quantitative and monetary data. The data employed for this
analysis stems from various sources (public consultation, literature, previous impact
assessments on related topics, workshops with stakeholders from business registers and
private sector as well as the expert opinion of the team drafting the impact assessment).
It is clear from Table 3 that the various impacts of the policy options cover both tangible (e.g.
administrative burden, adjustment costs) and intangible impacts (e.g. trust in the market); the
latter require a different methodological approach for the assessment. The tangible costs are
monetised either by employing the Standard Cost Model (Toolbox #60) or by cost comparison
of the baseline (e.g. IT costs). Furthermore, many impacts are also scored by the views from
stakeholders or by expert opinion on their magnitude of impact (see scoring system below) to
have a comparative qualitative analysis as well. It was decided that for the purpose of this
impact assessment it would not be relevant to monetise the intangible impacts through stated
preference experiments (due to limited rationale, difficulty of choosing a payment vehicle and
increased difficulty for the stakeholders) or through revealed preference (due to a lack of a
comparable market of public information), but that it was more appropriate to apply a
qualitative approach based on a straightforward scoring system. Furthermore, the policy
options are defined by a few dominant impacts all of which are monetised and which show a
clear trade-off (between administrative burdens for companies and adjustment costs for
business registers/public authorities). All the other impacts, which are of second order in
magnitude compared to the large trade-off, are assessed qualitatively (based on both
quantitative and qualitative information from various sources).
Some of the costs relate to direct impacts, which magnitude can be assessed relatively easy,
whereas other costs are (more) indirect and less likely to occur (see Table 2). More
specifically, some of the impacts are dependent on the specific implementation of the
initiative by Member States. For the assessment of the differences between the Member States
we have used the existing evidence and cost information from business registers in the
baseline to make assumptions about the cost information in the policy options. Often, this
information is based on a large group of business registers (e.g. the qualitative cost
information is based on 20 Member States) but not all (due to not having received response
from all Member States). Therefore, extrapolations were made for the missing business
registers, and the assessment was always conservative to make sure that the benefits were not
overestimated and the costs were not underestimated. Again, the approach was followed to
make sure that the net impact of the policy options was rather a lower end estimate than an
overestimation.
The scoring system applied in this Impact Assessment is straightforward and easy to
comprehend.
87
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0092.png
2.1.2. Scoring approach
As outlined above, the combination of quantitative, monetary and qualitative assessment was
adopted in this study. Some of the more intangible impacts were scored by the available
evidence gathered from stakeholders, literature, previous impact assessment and/or the expert
assessment of the unit drafting the Impact Assessment. For reasons of clarity, all the available
evidence is translated into a straightforward scoring system to have comparable scores
between policy options as well as between various impacts.
The scores range from 0 to 5 for all three pillars of the evaluation (effectiveness, efficiency
and coherence).
Effectiveness:
The scoring system assessed to what extent the objective (or a specific part of the objective) is
realised by the policy option at hand.
5 means the objective is realised to a very large extent;
4 means the objective is realised to a large extent;
3 means the objective is realised to a moderate extent;
2 means the objective is realised to a rather limited extent;
1 means the objective is realised to a limited extent;
0: this option does not help the realization of this objective compared to the baseline.
Efficiency:
The scoring system is similar for costs and benefits, meaning that for costs it is an increase
compared to the baseline and for benefits it is an increase compared to the baseline as well.
5: means there is a very large increase in costs/benefits
4: means there is a large increase in costs/benefits
3: means there is a moderate increase in costs/benefits
2: means there is rather limited increase in costs/benefits
1: means there is limited increase in costs/benefits
0: this means that the impact does not change compared to the baseline.
Note 1: For the impacts for which there is monetized information, these impacts are also
translated into scores to assess the overall efficiency.
Note 2: the scores should be interpreted compared to the baseline. The scores should at this
stage not be assessed compared over various impacts. For instance, a score of 3 on
administrative burden could reflect a larger impact than a score of 3 for adjustment costs. This
88
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0093.png
relative comparison will be tackled in the Multi-criteria analysis (MCA) (see below under
section 2.5).
Coherence:
The scoring system assessed to what extent the policy option at hand improves internal and
external coherence.
5 means the coherence is improved to a very large extent;
4 means the coherence is improved to a large extent;
3 means the coherence is improved to a moderate extent;
2 means the coherence is improved to a rather limited extent;
1 means the coherence is improved to a limited extent;
0: this option does not help the coherence compared to the baseline.
2.2. E
FFECTIVENESS OF THE POLICY OPTIONS
In this section, the options are analysed in order to assess to what extent they will reach the
policy objectives of the initiative.
Table 1: Effectiveness of policy options 1 to make more company information available
in business registers and/or BRIS
Policy option 1a - Make information about partnerships and third country company
branches available in BRIS
Policy option 1b - Option 1a + make information about group structures and
ownership available in national registers and BRIS
Policy option 1c - Option 1b + make information about place of management and
place of the main economic activity available in national registers and BRIS
PO1a
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount
and improving the
reliability of company
data
available
in
business registers and
accessible cross-border
through BRIS
2
PO1b
3
PO1c
5
Motivation
The consultation activities (public consultation,
targeted consultation of SMEs and survey for the
supporting study) showed strong support for
making more company data available cross-
border, with majorities in favour for all
transparency measures
153
. Additional targeted
consultations with stakeholders and experts also
confirmed this. Some stakeholder groups
highlighted specific types of data: for instance,
153
See annex 2 with synopsis for details of stakeholder views.
89
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0094.png
SMEs expressed highest support for having
comparable information about additional legal
entities; legal practitioners, company law
professors and tax public authorities stressed the
importance of information on groups.
While all the options would contribute to address
the needs of the stakeholders by making more
company data available and thus be effective in
meeting the objective, PO1c will be most
effective. PO1c will provide most company
information available in business registers and
cross-border through BRIS in terms of types of
data but also numbers of companies covered.
While option 1a will cover 2 million partnerships,
and 1b also 135 450 cross-border groups, option
1c will make available information about place of
management and economic activity of all 16
million limited liability companies.
However, none of these options will ensure that
the company data would be more reliable as they
will focus on data availability without having
impact on its accuracy and correctness (including
being up-to-date).
The objective of enabling direct use of company
data in cross-border situations will be achieved
primarily by measures described below. However,
measures under policy options 1 will also
contribute to this objective as company data can
only be used cross-border if it is available in
business registers and cross-border through BRIS.
This means that the more company data is made
accessible in business registers and through BRIS,
the more direct use can be made of it in cross-
border situations. Therefore, PO1c is the most
effective measure to meet the sought objective as
it would make the most company information
available via BRIS. However, the scores are
relatively low given that the availability of
information is only the pre-requisite for this
objective, but cannot meet it alone.
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of
company data available
in business registers
when setting up cross-
border
branches/subsidiaries
and in other cross-
border activities and
situations
1
2
3
Table 2: Effectiveness of policy options 2 to interconnect BRIS with other systems and
enable better searches
Policy option 2a – Interconnection of BRIS with beneficial ownership registers
interconnection system (BORIS), use of EUID (European unique company identifier),
new search functionalities in BRIS
90
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0095.png
Policy option 2b - Option 2a + Interconnection with Insolvency Registers
interconnection system (IRI)
PO2a
PO2b
4
Motivation
Interconnection of BRIS with other EU level
interconnection systems and the use of EUID to link the
information available about a particular company across
those systems would make it possible to search for more
company data in one place. Across all consultation
activities, the majority of respondents were in favour of
interconnecting BRIS with the interconnection of
beneficial ownerships (BORIS) and of insolvency
registers (IRI). Member State experts have also
considered such interconnection beneficial. Additional
search functionalities in BRIS – supported by majority of
respondents to the public consultation and SME panel -
would also contribute to this objective by making it easier
to find company data in BRIS based on more search
criteria (e.g. also by legal form). PO2b is the most
effective measure as it will connect BRIS with two more
interconnection systems and therefore facilitate access to
more company data.
This objective will be achieved primarily by measures
described below. However, the use of the EUID as a
unique company identifier will also contribute to
facilitating the cross-border use of company data,
including by business registers, public authorities or
courts, as it helps to unequivocally identify companies
and e.g. their cross-border branches, companies which are
part of cross-border mergers, divisions or conversions
154
.
This information is valuable to all stakeholders including
creditors and shareholders. Making it possible to search
for more company data in one place through
interconnecting BRIS with other systems can also
facilitate the cross-border use of company data. However,
the scores are relatively low given that the availability of
information is only the pre-requisite for this objective, but
cannot meet it alone.
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount
and improving the
reliability of company
data
available
in
business registers and
accessible cross-border
through BRIS
3
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of
company data available
in business registers
when setting up cross-
border
branches/subsidiaries
and in other cross-
border activities and
situations
2
2
Table 3: Effectiveness of policy options 3 to ensure an adequate verification of company
data before it is entered into the business register
154
Policy Option 3a - obligation to check a harmonised list of elements
See description of EPREL system in section 2.2 of the Impact Assessment as an
example.
91
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0096.png
Policy Option 3b – Option 3a + common basic procedural requirements for ensuring
reliable and up-to-date data
PO3a
PO3b
4
Motivation
In the consultation activities, many stakeholders
confirmed that introducing common rules for verification
of company data before it is entered into business
registers would increase its reliability. For instance, 43%
of respondents to the public consultation considered such
common rules as the 2
nd
most important means to
facilitate the cross-border use of company data. The
assessment by company law professors also confirmed
that harmonising the requirements for ex-ante verification
is the appropriate measure to increase reliability of
company data
155
. The importance of adequate checks for
ensuring the reliability of company data in business
registers was in general underlined by legal professionals,
in particular notaries. PO3a will already contribute to
increasing the reliability of company data cross-border by
ensuring that same elements are checked in all Member
States but PO3b will be more effective by also
introducing some additional procedural standards to
ensure reliability (e.g. including common filing
deadlines).
By increasing the reliability of company data on a cross-
border basis, the proposed measures will address the
current insufficient trust in company data between
business registers, public authorities or courts in different
Member States, and therefore contribute to facilitating
direct use of such company data (i.e. without additional
formalities). Discussions with experts confirmed that a
harmonised standard of verification would build trust in
company data from other Member States. PO3b will be
more effective as it will provide more harmonised rules
relevant for reliability of company data and therefore is
likely to result in more trust in company data between
Member State registers and authorities cross-border.
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount
and improving the
reliability of company
data
available
in
business registers and
accessible cross-border
through BRIS
3
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of
company data available
in business registers
when setting up cross-
border
branches/subsidiaries
and in other cross-
border activities and
situations
2
4
155
Commission expert group consisting of company law professors (ICLEG) proposed to consider rules for verification and
checking of company data at EU level to further improve the reliability of registers in their paper on the cross-border use of
company data.
92
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0097.png
Table 4: Effectiveness of policy options to enable direct use of company data from
business registers in cross-border situations
Policy Option 4a - Requirement to apply once-only principle (no resubmission of
company information) when a company from a Member State sets up subsidiaries or
branches in other Member States
Policy Option 4b – Option 4a + harmonised company extract containing a common set
of company data and mutual recognition principle for certain company data
Policy Option 4c - Option 4b + abolition of formalities e.g. apostille
PO4a PO4b
Specific objective 1:
Increasing the amount
and improving the
reliability of company
data
available
in
business registers and
accessible cross-border
through BRIS
1
2
PO4c Motivation
2
This objective of having more and more reliable
company data will be achieved primarily by
measures described above. However, measures
under policy options 4 can indirectly contribute to
this objective as well. For instance, introducing a
common company extract with a common set of
company data, translated into all EU languages
under PO4b will mean that every company has the
same data in the common extract, and that the data
is thus comparable and multilingual, which
contributes to the transparency and creates more
trust about companies. Still, the scores are low
given that these measures will only to an extent
indirectly impact the objective.
There was clear feedback from stakeholders in the
consultation activities (public consultation, SME
panel) that not having to resubmit the company
information already available in their business
register would help in setting up subsidiaries and
branches cross-border or in contacts with
authorities/courts in other Member States.
Similarly, stakeholders stated that being able to use
a common company extract and having less
formalities (e.g. no apostille) would facilitate the
use of company data when dealing with competent
authorities or in court proceedings in another
Member State. Targeted consultations, in particular
with legal professionals, also confirmed that
introducing a common company extract would be
very helpful to enable direct use of company data
and that formalities, including apostille, cause
considerable costs and delays.
PO4a will already provide a significant
improvement by resulting in fully direct use of data
about parent companies - without the need for
93
Specific Objective 2:
Enabling direct use of
company data available
in business registers
when setting up cross-
border
branches/subsidiaries
and in other cross-
border activities and
situations
3
4
5
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0098.png
companies to resubmit information and without
formalities - between business registers in different
Member States when setting up cross-border
subsidiaries and branches. However, options PO4b
and c will be more effective as they will in addition
address obstacles in other cross-border situations,
e.g. in administrative or courts procedures. PO4c
will be most effective as it will, in addition to
introducing a common company extract under
PO4b also remove formalities (e.g. apostille on
company data such as extracts).
2.3. E
FFICIENCY OF THE POLICY OPTIONS
This section analyses the efficiency of the various policy options based on the mapping of the
impacts. The text below details the approach followed for each of the impacts separately and
tables below shows the overview of the scoring for the efficiency criterion.
2.3.1 Methodology of the efficiency scoring
For the efficiency scoring, the standard cost model (see Toolbox #60) is mainly used as well
as for example for IT development cost estimations are used for IT costs. Please see above.
For more information, see section 2.1.1. This section details the assumptions and cost
calculation in detail.
Table in Annex 6 includes the number of limited liability companies and partnerships in the
EU as well as number of new cross-border subsidiaries and branches.
Policy options 1
Policy option 1a:
Make information about partnerships and third country company branches available in
BRIS
No costs have been calculated for businesses for this option as the information to be made
available through BRIS (partnerships and branches of third country companies) is already
available in the national business registers as they have already been disclosed by entities
concerned. Thus, there is no additional filing fees foreseen for businesses; there will be only
development costs for business registers to make this information available through BRIS. IT
development costs for business registers are estimated 100.000 EUR per Member State, 2.7
million EUR in total. This figure is based on Member States costs to do the necessary
developments for connection to BRIS so far (the same amount is calculated for each policy
option).
Policy options 1b + 1c:
Option 1a + make information about group structures and ownership (1b) + place of
management and place of main economic activity (1c) available in national registers and
BRIS
94
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0099.png
There are approximately 135.450 groups of companies in the EU
156
. The proportion of
Member States that record information related to groups of companies in their business
registers is, depending on the type of information, is between 19 and 24% (supporting study).
An average of 21,5% has been calculated as the share of Member States where information on
groups is already available in the national business registers. This option also includes single
member limited liability companies in the EU. Current EU law
157
requires that information
about the single member of the single-member limited liability companies are disclosed
mainly in the business register which is the case at least in 21 Member States (support study).
Single-member companies are limited liability companies and also used in group structures.
Therefore there is no filing cost for such information
According to the supporting study, 37% of the companies are located in a Member State of
which the business register already collects the information on place of management and 46%
of companies are located in a Member State of which the business register has already
information on main economic activity. Thus, it is calculated that remaining 63 of the
companies will need to file the information on place of management and 54% of the
companies will need to file information on place of economic activity. The number of groups
is subtracted from the total number of limited liability companies to avoid double counting.
The single member companies are limited liability companies, and thus included in the total
number of limited liability companies.
Costs for options 1b and 1c: Companies are obliged to have information about their
shareholders in business registers or in a register at the company’s place
158
and to know the
group structure under EU law obligations
159
. Therefore, companies normally have information
on subsidiaries, parent companies and shareholders. As to the place of management and place
of main economic activity, this is clearly information which companies also have. This means
that there is no cost for companies to collect such information. Therefore, the calculations are
based on filing costs in the business registers which are divergent in Member States. While in
several Member States filing is free of charge for the companies, in many Member States
filing is based on a flat rate (i.e. without consideration what information is filed), while in the
rest of the Member States the actual filing cost depends on what company information is filed.
In the latter group of Member States, the filing costs of similar information (e.g. change of
director) have been considered. Alternatively, it could be considered that business registers
cannot charge for this initial filing in order to avoid any administrative burden on companies
and also because this does not represent a loss of existing revenue for business registers.
However, because there are some adjustment costs for business registers and loss of revenue
due to other measures which will be included in this initiative, this impact assessment takes a
conservative approach and assesses potential filing costs for those companies which need to
do this new filing. The calculation took into account that i) it is not possible to foresee what
filing costs Member States will require for the additional information and ii) Member States
should limit the filing costs by setting the rule that initial filing costs for these items should
not be set separately. Thus, the filing costs for these three items have been set at 20 EUR as a
one-off cost for companies. Time spent with filing is calculated 5 minutes work for a person
156
157
European statistical register on multinational enterprise groups.
Directive 89/ 667/EEC
158
FATF recommendation 24.
159
E.g. Directive 2013/34/EU, Directive (EU) 2015/849 as amended by Directive (EU) 2018/843 and proposal
COM(2021) 420 final.
95
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0100.png
in the company who does the filing (25 EUR/hour
160
) given that this is information that is
normally readily available within the company. This time is calculated separately for each
item under policy options 1b and 1c, thus three times five minutes for all three items
altogether.
IT development costs for business registers are estimated at 100.000 EUR per Member State,
2.7 million EUR in total. This figure is based on information received from Member States on
the costs to do the necessary developments for new versions of BRIS, for example for the
update due to the Digitalisation Directive. Based on that figure, the combined IT costs for all
relevant options under this initiative are estimated to be altogether around 5,4 million EUR.
For the purpose of cost estimations of different options, this amount has been divided equally
between options 1 and 4, where such IT development costs are involved.
Policy options 2
Policy Option 2a:
- interconnection of BRIS with beneficial owners registers interconnection system
(BORIS)
- use of EUID (European unique company identifier) to link company information
stored in different
- new search functionalities in BRIS
Development costs of BRIS by the Commission, including new search functionalities is
estimated to be 100.000 EUR, based on the costs of the central system’s development so far.
The use of EUID will not entail costs as this already exists in BRIS based on the national
business register number of the companies. There will be no costs for companies or separate
costs for business registers.
Policy Option 2b:
Option 2a + Interconnection with Insolvency Registers interconnection system (IRI)
Development costs of BRIS by the Commission, including new search functionalities is
estimated to be 500.000 EUR, based on the costs of the central system’s development so far.
Policy options 3
Policy Option 3a:
- obligation to check a harmonised list of elements
Given the differences between the national systems and procedures, the real cost varies from
Member State to Member State. While some Member States will have no or very low cost,
others may face a higher cost. For the purposes of the cost estimations an average for all
Member States is calculated. Therefore, 2 FTEs per Member State – 54 FTE altogether per
year – is estimated based on the input from business registers to the survey. The total cost thus
would be EUR 4,050,000.
160
Eurostat standard
96
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0101.png
Policy Option 3b:
Policy Option 3a + common basic procedural requirements for ensuring reliable and up-
to-date data
For the same reason as above, an average cost for all Member States is calculated. The
procedural requirements are not estimated to increase the average FTEs need per year as
explained above.
Policy options 4
Policy Option 4a:
Requirement to apply once-only principle (no resubmission of company information)
when a company from a Member State sets up subsidiaries or branches in other
Member States
The measures under this option cover the situation when a company sets up a subsidiary or a
branch in another Member State (so creation of a new company or fixed establishment in
another Member State). The basis of the calculations is that there are approximately 15.6
million limited liability companies in the EU. According to the available information from the
supporting study (based on ORBIS), there are approximately half a million EU subsidiaries
(i.e. companies with a separate legal personality) belonging to ultimate owners located in the
EU. According to the supporting study and based on data from ORBIS, the number of new
incorporations of cross-border EU subsidiaries in 2021 was 3.686. This represents around
0,7% of the existing subsidiaries, thus this figure could well be underestimated. As regards
cross-border branches of EU companies, there are no recent figures available and multiple
attempts were made to gather this data. The estimation is therefore based on the available data
from 2008. Although it is highly likely, that there is an increase in number of new cross-
border branches per year since 2008, nevertheless 2008 figure related to the creation of new
cross-border branches is used as a conservative approach. Additionally, given that we cannot
foresee to what extent the number of branches and subsidiaries would increase as a result of
the implementation of the policy options in the future, we have kept the number of newly
started branches and subsidiaries constant over time. Again, this will be an underestimation
and the benefits are very likely to be higher.
When setting up these cross-border subsidiaries and branches, companies need to receive a
company extract in all cases (8186). The estimated average cost for certified extract is 5 EUR
(annex 7).
As a conservative estimation, in 20% of the cases, they also need the instrument of
constitution (i.e. in 80% of the cases this is not required, thus no costs attached). Depending
on the Member States, such documents also need to be translated into the official language of
the Member States where the subsidiary or the branch is being set up. It is assumed that only
75% of the instrument of constitution and also of the company extracts is translated because
some countries have similar language. The average cost for translation of extract and
instrument of constitution is estimated to be 33,05 EUR per page (see annex 8). It is estimated
that 3 pages are translated for extract and 15 pages for the instrument of constitution.
Finally, the expert estimation (also taking into account legal uncertainty due to the unclear
rules and different practices and as a conservative estimation) is that in 75% of the cases
97
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0102.png
(6139) apostilles are needed for such documents. The average cost of apostille is 12 euro
(annex 8).
Two days of work (883,20 minutes, 25 EUR/hour) are calculated for an employee in the
company to carry out all the steps under this option (both for subsidiaries and branches as the
procedure is similar). The cost for lawyer to get the documents is estimated to be 350 EUR.
To be noted, that the cost estimations do not include the possible involvement and cost of a
notary.
It is estimated that the common extract would be available free of charge for companies for
cross-border use once per year and are to amount to a loss of revenue of EUR 40,000 per year
for business registers. In addition, the loss of revenue would be 74,000 EUR per year for those
public authorities in charge of issuing apostille (based on the same assumptions).
Policy Option 4b:
Policy Option 4a + harmonised company extract containing a common set of company
data and mutual recognition principle for certain company data
While the option 4a covered the setting up a new company (subsidiary) or establishment
(branch) in another Member State, this option covers the need of all companies to get an
extract in any other context of cross-border activities during their life-time. Under this option
the process to get a company extract for cross-border used and its cost is assessed.
The starting point is that there are approximately 15.8 million limited liability companies in
the EU. There are different figures available concerning cross-border activities of SMEs.
According to the Impact Assessment for the Public Documents Regulation in 2010, more than
44% of them are involved in some form of international contact. The Impact Assessment for
BRIS in 2011 estimated that 25% of small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) in Europe
export and 29% import within the single market. The SME Strategy 2020 stated that the
single market accounts for 70% of the value of SME goods exports, and 80% of all exporting
SMEs sell to other Member States.
In addition, for comparison, in 2021, around 9.0 million extracts were issued by business
registers in 5 Member States
161
. Although these figures do not make a distinction between
company extracts issued for domestic and cross-border use, it shows the magnitude of the use
of the extracts.
This Impact assessment is based on the assumption that 10% of the limited liability
companies (i.e. 1.56 million) need one extract every year. As explained above, this
assumption is rather conservative given the share of companies engaged in cross-border
activities and also the number of extracts delivered. In addition, it is likely that many
companies need an extract more than once per year.
In order to assess the costs related to getting the extract. Two basic situations are considered
to calculate the savings: 1) when company extract is requested today from the business
register with the help of a lawyer (50% of the cases) or 2) or without the help of a layer, i.e.
when the company gets it itself from the business register (50% of the cases). If a lawyer is
161
Information received from Member States.
98
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0103.png
involved, then the cost of the lawyer’s work is 150 EUR, and the extract costs 5 EUR. If the
company gets it itself from the business register, then the time spent with the process is 240
minutes (25 EUR/hour) and the cost of the extract is 5 EUR. As regards translation costs of
company extracts, it is assumed that it is needed only in 75% of the cases, as in the remaining
25% the language of the extract is accepted by the other Member State (e.g. an extract from
Belgium in French to be used in France). To be noted, that these estimations do not include
the possible involvement and cost of a notary. It is estimated that the common extract would
be available free of charge for companies for cross-border use once per year and are to
amount to a loss of revenue of EUR 7.9 million per year for business registers.
Policy Option 4c:
Option 4b + abolition of formalities e.g. apostille
To calculate the savings under this option, the average cost of apostille is considered to be 12
EUR. As a conservative estimation, it is assumed that only in half of the cases an apostille is
needed. As above, it is assumed that in half of the remaining cases, the company extract is
requested with the help of the lawyer, in the other half the company gets it itself. If a lawyer is
involved, the cost of the lawyer is 150 EUR, and the apostille is 12 EUR. If the company gets
it itself, then it is assumed that the employee of the company will work 240 minutes at 25
EUR hourly rate and the apostille costs again 12 EUR. As under option 4b it is estimated that
the common extract would be available free of charge for companies for cross-border use
once per year and are to amount to a loss of revenue of EUR 7.9 million per year for business
registers. In addition, the loss of revenue would be 9.5 million EUR per year for those public
authorities in charge of issuing apostille (based on the same assumptions).
IT development costs for business registers are estimated 100.000 EUR per Member State, 2.7
million EUR in total. This figure is based on Member States costs to do the necessary
developments for connection to BRIS so far.
99
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0104.png
Standard cost model calculations on administrative burden
Policy option 1
Policy option 4
100
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0105.png
101
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0106.png
102
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0107.png
Policy options 1 to make more company information available in business registers and/or BRIS
Policy option 1a - Make information about partnerships and third country company branches available in BRIS
Policy option 1b - Option 1a + make information about group structures and ownership available in national registers and BRIS
Policy option 1c - Option 1b + make information about place of management and place of the main economic activity available in
national registers and BRIS
Unit
measurement
of
PO 1a
PO 1b
PO 1c
Motivation
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESSES
Trust and
transparency in
the market
Score 1-5
2
3
4
These options will increase the transparency and availability of information in the
market for businesses on the one hand and the accompanying trust this would generate
in the market. The access to information and the trust in the market, however, cannot
be assessed separately.
Option 1c would score the highest compared to options 1b and 1a as it provides the
most company data comparable and easily available across the EU and thus contributes
most to enhance trust and transparency in the market/business environment. There was
strong support for all transparency measures in the surveys carried out by the
Commission and in the supporting study. 87% of those replying in the public
consultation in favour of more harmonised company information available at EU level
(67 out of 78), especially that finding/checking information about a company was seen
as the most important reason for needing company data and as lack of comparable data
and not being able to find it at EU level were the most often mentioned difficulties.
All stakeholder groups (esp. legal practitioners, public authorities and companies) in
the supporting study surveys considered that the most significant benefit from these
103
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0108.png
measures was enhancing trust in business environment (91% - 73% of legal
practitioners, 65% - 53% of public authorities and 56% - 53% of companies).
Although it is difficult to estimate the value of information, according to the recent
estimate
162
, direct users attributed the greatest value to the provision of financial
information (e.g. annual reports and financial statements) which exist in the business
register. The value of basic company information (e.g. registered addresses, company
numbers, dates of incorporation, nature of business) is estimated to be slightly lower, at
approximately £800 (950 euros) per user per year.
It can be reasonably assumed that the value of reliable information in the cross border
context of the EU BRIS would not be less, but probably significantly higher than the
value of information in a national setting as described by the White Paper cited above.
Ease of doing
business and
access to the
market
Score 1-5
1
2
2
Easing the doing of business (or reducing the hassle) and facilitating access to other
Member States’ market is a corollary to the increased transparency and trust.
Companies will find more easily, comparable, multilingual (harmonised) information
about business partners, potential clients etc. in other Member States. Similarly, when
companies are accessing other Member States’ markets, for example creditors will
have easy access to the information about the company which will potentially facilitate
access to finance and the creation of businesses. It is also likely that potential investors
will more easily invest in SMEs in other Member States due to better information
about the investment targets. Companies themselves will save time (hassle cost) in
searching information about business partners which will contribute to making it easier
to do business cross-border and access other markets. 115 out of 117 of SMEs
responding in the SME panel thought that having comparable information about
additional legal entities (e.g. partnerships) at EU level could most help when looking
for information about companies from other Member States, and majorities were also
in favour for other measures (109-112 out of 113-114).
162
“Corporate Transparency and Register Reform White Paper” from the UK Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy.
104
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0109.png
All stakeholder groups (esp. legal practitioners, public authorities and companies) in
the supporting study surveys considered that the second most significant benefit from
these measures was making it easier to search for information about business partners
abroad (55% of legal practitioners for additional entities and groups, 47% of public
authorities and 47%-40% of companies).
Administrative
burden
reduction
COSTS FOR BUSINESSES
Administrative
burden
increase(one-off
cost)
Score
1-5 0
Standard Cost
Model
calculations
2
4
There will be no new filing for partnerships as information about partnerships already
exists in all business registers or for third-country branches i.e. no cost (policy option
1a). Concerning groups, there is no costs for companies to collect such information
because all companies (under FATF) are already required to either file information
about shareholders to the business register or to keep a shareholder register at the
company. The new filing cost related to groups and place of management and place of
economic activity will be only for those companies, which do not need to file such
information to the register today. It will be one-off cost and companies can comply
with it over a period of time (for example 3 years). In addition, the initial filing costs
for these items cannot be set separately so that filing costs can be limited. Overall,
companies considered the effect on the administrative cost to be at least neutral or
rather reducing it. In the supporting study surveys and workshops, 20% of companies
thought that there will be no impact on administrative costs and around 34% that there
would be an overall administrative cost reduction, while 20% thought that the
administrative cost would increase. The overall administrative cost reduction reflects
the fact that different authorities could have access to this information in business
registers without the need for the company to provide it to each authority separately
and also that the company itself can find that information easily about its business
partners.
n/a – covered under admin increase below
643.105 311.31
0.343
105
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0110.png
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS
Savings related
to operational
costs
Score 1-5
2
2
2
Business registers will benefit from increased company data in BRIS. This data exists
in multilingual form and is comparable, so business registers can more easily
understand it and use it. This facilitates their work when they register companies (e.g.
foreign companies, companies as shareholders) or when checking data about
companies, preparing reports. Although the cost savings could be slightly bigger in
relation to the policy option PO1c given that it provides for most additional
information, it is however considered that overall the policy options have not an
important impact in terms of cost savings for business registers.
BENEFITS FOR OTHER PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Savings related
to operational
cost for other
public
authorities
Score 1-5
2
3
3
When more company data is comparable and easily accessible cross-border, public
authorities can consult this information when checking data about companies directly
without the need to search or ask companies for it. This means savings in particular in
time. It is clear from consultations that public authorities (e.g. tax authorities) have
strong interest in the company data under these policy options and that these measures
will also bring strong benefits in terms of trust and transparency in the market, as
explained above. The options 1b and 1c will create more benefits as information on
groups, place of management and economic activity is of specific importance for
public authorities (e.g. responsible for tax).
COSTS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS/PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Adjustment
costs for
Score 1-5
2
2
2
One-off IT costs for updating the system but no need for additional staff for
maintenance once new company data is included in the system (therefore no need to
106
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0111.png
business
registers
IT costs
€2.7
million
IT
develop
ment
cost (€
100.000
per MS)
€2.7
million
IT
develop
ment
cost (€
100.000
per
MS)
€2.7
million
IT
develop
ment
cost (€
100.00
0 per
MS)
calculate FTEs). The IT costs are considered the same for all options because the
difference is considered to be minor. The costs related to the necessary developments
in the central platform of BRIS resulting from these options will be covered by the
evolutive maintenance of the system under the EU budget
163
.
Adjustment
costs for other
public
authorities
BENEFITS FOR SOCIETY AT LARGE (i.e. CONSUMERS)
Fight against
fraud and abuse
Score 1-5
2
3
4
N/A as no specific adjustment costs.
Making information on partnerships more comparable and accessible helps as these
legal forms can also be used for abusive purposes. Information on groups and also on
place of economic activity will add to the benefits as these provide important
information in context to tackle fraud and abuse (e.g. related to letterbox companies).
Most stakeholder groups in the supporting study survey thought that having
comparable information under all the options (and in particular on additional entities
and on place of economic activity) would contribute to the fight against anti-
competitive behaviour and abuse. In particular 53% of public authorities for all options
and legal practitioners (64% on groups and 45% on place of management). Importance
of information on group structure also stressed by ICLEG
(Having a clear view of the
163
The total overall yearly maintenance cost of BRIS which includes the analysis, design, implementation, testing and corrective maintenance costs of BRIS currently
incurred by the Commission is EUR 2 million, financed by the Digital Europe Programme.
107
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0112.png
structure of the group, may also prove useful, and even essential, for authorities to
investigate and contrast any possible tax or any other abuse or violation of law).
Therefore, PO1c would the most efficient in terms of benefits, while PO1b and PO1a
would also bring benefits but in a slightly lesser degree.
Digital economy
Score 1-5
1
2
2
The information in all POs would be accessible cross-border through digital means
(through BRIS). All the policy options would thus have a positive impact on the digital
economy and digital Single Market. Po1c and Po1b are scored higher given that they
would make more data available cross-border than PO1a.
The objective of these policy options is to enhance transparency about companies in
the Single Market, through the use of digital tools (such as BRIS). As explained above,
this would create transparency and trust in the Single Market and help authorities to
tackle fraud and abuse. More information about companies would also help consumers
to make informed choices when buying, using services or contracting cross-border.
This would in general contribute to a fairer Single Market. However, given that there is
an overlap with other impacts in this table, the scoring is not counted twice.
Functioning of
the internal
market
Policy options 2 to interconnect BRIS with other systems and enable better searches
Policy option 2a – Interconnection of BRIS with beneficial ownership register interconnection system (BORIS), use of EUID (European
unique company identifier), new search functionalities in BRIS
Policy option 2b - Option 2a + Interconnection with Insolvency Registers interconnection system (IRI)
Unit
of PO 2a
measurement
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESSES
PO 2b
Motivation
108
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0113.png
Trust and transparency in
Score 1-5
the market
3
4
These options will reinforce trust and transparency in the market. Stakeholders will
be able to search information about a specific company easily in several registers
with the help of the unique company identifier (EUID). EUID exists today for
around 16 million limited liability companies and their cross-border branches in
BRIS. BORIS also uses it. By extending the use of EUID to partnerships and
connecting information in different registers with the help of EUID ensures that the
company is unequivocally identified in every register and that data in different
registers is connected to the same company. EUID has no cost implications on
companies. It is based on the national registration number. Strong support in public
consultation for both interconnections, with majority of respondents saying that it
would be useful to link BRIS with the EU interconnection of beneficial ownership
registers (70%, 58 out of 83) and the EU interconnection of insolvency registers
(61%, 51 out of 83). Therefore, having BRIS connected with BORIS (PO2a) would
already bring benefits but these would be higher if BRIS is also connected with IRI
as then more company information is accessible in one place for all stakeholders,
increasing also trust in the market (Po2b).
In addition, 83% of respondents to the public consultation asked for more search
functionalities centrally at EU level via BRIS (50 out of 60) which is included in
both policy options.
Ease of doing business and
access to the market
Score 1-5
1
1
As for transparency measures, companies would save in search cost for information
about a specific company in other Member States through better and more
accessible information. This will make it easier to do business with business
partners abroad, as explained under the trust and transparency in the market impact
above. The options are scored at the same level given that the difference of their
impact on doing business cross border and accessing other markets is not
important.
The interconnection between BRIS and BORIS could also contribute to reducing
administrative burden on companies. For example, the obliged entities under the
Anti-Money Laundering Directive could cross-check the company information
Administrative burden
reduction
Score 1-5
1
1
109
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0114.png
directly through BRIS. The same would also apply to the Insolvency register. Both
options score similarly in this respect because this would rather rely on practical
implementation.
COSTS FOR BUSINESSES
Administrative burden
increase
-
-
See above. EUID does not entail any cost for companies. N/A.
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS/PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Operational cost savings
for business registers
Score 1-5
2
3
Similarly to other stakeholders, business registers will also benefit from connecting
the interconnections as it will be possible to check all data via accessing one
interconnection of registers instead of two or three. This makes it easier for
business registers to search/consult this information when checking data about
companies. In the surveys for the supporting study, 65% of business registers said
that it would be useful to a large or very large extent to link BRIS to BORIS and
61% to IRI. In addition, these interconnections could bring operational cost savings
for those business registers which also hold beneficial ownership registers thanks
to improved synergy. Higher benefit for option 2b as more systems will be
interconnected.
When more company data is easily accessible cross-border, then public authorities
can consult this information directly without the need to search or ask companies
for it. This means savings in particular in time. It is clear from consultations that
public authorities have strong interest in the company data under these policy
options and that these measures will also bring strong benefits in terms of trust and
transparency in the market, as explained above. In the surveys for the supporting
study, 69% of public authorities said that it would be useful to a large or very large
extent to link BRIS to BORIS and 69% of public authorities thought so in relation
to IRI.
Savings related to
operational costs for public
authorities
Score 1-5
2
3
110
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0115.png
COSTS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS/PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Adjustment costs for
business registers
-
-
N/A as the adjustment costs would be financed at EU level because the EU systems
would be interconnected. Development costs of BRIS by the Commission,
including new search functionalities is estimated to be 500,000 EUR, based on the
costs of the central system’s development so far.
N/A as no specific adjustment costs due to interconnection.
Adjustment costs for other
public authorities
Score 1-5
-
-
BENEFITS FOR SOCIETY AT LARGE (i.e. CONSUMERS)
Fight against fraud and
abuse
Score 1-5
2
3
Easier access to more sets for information (about companies, about beneficial
owners, about insolvent companies) will facilitate the work of authorities and
obliged entities (under the Anti-money laundering rules) to check the information
about companies and detect abuse. Higher benefit for option 2b as more systems
will be interconnected.
Interconnecting the EU level systems of interconnection would strongly contribute
to creating more connected public administrations at EU level and cross-border. In
addition, the use of EUID would make it possible to also connect other EU level
systems/registers (as the example of EPREL) to BRIS, bringing further befits. Both
options are scored equally given that both significantly contribute to the
digitalisation of the Single Market.
The objective of these policy options is to enhance transparency about companies
in the Single Market further through connecting EU level systems. As explained
above, this would create transparency and trust in the Single Market and help
authorities to tackle fraud and abuse. More information about companies would
also help consumers to make informed choices when buying, using services or
contracting cross-border. This would in general contribute to a fairer Single
Market. However, given that there is an overlap with other impacts in this table, the
scoring is not counted twice.
Digital economy
Score 1-5
3
3
Functioning of the internal
market
111
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0116.png
Policy options 3 to ensure an adequate verification of company data before it is entered into the business register
Policy Option 3a - obligation to check a harmonised list of elements
Policy Option 3b – Option 3a + common basic procedural requirements for ensuring reliable and up-to-date data
Unit
measurement
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESSES
Trust and
transparency in the
market
Score 1-5
of PO 3a
PO 3b
Motivation
3
4
Having more reliable company data in business registers, as a result of these
measures, will bring more trust and more legal certainty in the market for all
stakeholders, and the benefits should be higher for option 3b as there would be
additional common requirements for checks making the data more trustworthy for
business registers from other Member States. Around 40% of public authorities, a
third of legal practitioners, a quarter of companies and of business registers saw
increased legal certainty as the main benefit from the measures making it possible to
use company information in cross-border administrative or court procedures (which
in the survey also included introducing the ex-ante checks). Commission expert
group consisting of company law professors (ICLEG) recommended the extension
of the current EU minimum standards for verification and checking of company
data. Increased legal certainty will be beneficial for companies, legal practitioners,
public authorities, creditors and all other stakeholders. It will reduce transaction
costs. Having data available is the pre-requisite, but to create the necessary trust, the
data has to be accurate and up-to-date.
Having more reliable company data in business registers, as a result of these
measures, would make such data easier to use cross-border (as also mentioned by
ICLEG, see point above on trust). Defining common minimum rules for ex-ante
check was the 2
nd
most important means to facilitate the use of company data on a
112
Ease of doing
business and access
to the market
Score 1-5
2
3
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0117.png
cross-border basis according to 43% of respondents to the public consultation.
Ensuring that the company data in business registers and in BRIS is reliable creates
legal certainty and will further facilitate companies access to finance and result in
enhanced investment opportunities. Companies can also rely on the information
when searching business partners in another Member States and other opportunities
to expand cross-border. PO3b creates more legal certainity through enhanced
harmonised checks and procedures.
Administrative
burden reduction
Score 1-5
-
-
N/A. On its own, this measure would not result in tangible administrative burden
reduction for companies. It will help companies vis-à-vis third parties, such as
creditors and shareholders who can rely on the information.
Companies replying to the surveys for the supporting study held mixed views,
although more companies still expected rather a decrease in administrative costs
(35%) than an increase (28%).
COSTS FOR BUSINESSES
Administrative
burden increase
-
-
N/A. In principle, there should not be increase in costs for companies.
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS/PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Operational cost
savings for business
registers
Score 1-5
1
2
These measures should result in business registers receiving/being able to access
more reliable data from other registers and therefore needing to ask less additional
documents, in principle resulting in less operational costs (higher with more reliable
company data under option 3b).
In the surveys for the supporting study, 27% of the responding registers expected a
small (and 14% a significant) increase in administrative costs for introducing
minimum common standards; in the workshop, 10 registers anticipated a slight rise
in administrative costs but participants said that benefits will outweigh the
113
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0118.png
administrative costs.
Operational cost
savings for public
authorities
3
4
These measures should result in public authorities receiving/being able to access
more reliable data from registers from other Member States and therefore needing to
ask less additional documents, in principle resulting in less operational costs (higher
with more reliable company data under option 3b). PO3 will also ensure that all
Member States implement the FATF recommendation 24 (as revised in March
2022) which requires that basic company data in the business registers is adequate,
accurate and up-to-date.
COSTS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS/PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Adjustment costs for
Score 1-5
business registers
2
2 FTEs
per MS –
54 FTE
altogether
per year.
EUR
4,050,000
2
2 FTEs
per MS –
54 FTE
altogether
per year.
EUR
4,050,000
50% of business registers responding to the surveys for the supporting study
indicate that introducing common ex-ante checks would lead to a significant or
small increase in adjustment costs, with 10% expecting significant or small
decreases, and 18% - no impact. According to 10 business registers taking part in
the workshop, adjustment costs were projected to rise only slightly as many
registers considered there were already ex-ante checks in place. There will be higher
adjustment costs for option 3b as there will be more common requirements.
Business register in this context is understood to include any other authority or
person who is involved in ex-ante verification depending on the Member State.
Option 3b (and to a lesser extent option 3a) could create some limited enforcement
costs for business registers which would need to ensure that e.g. their registers are
kept updated, and that filing deadlines are complied with (but e.g. no need for on-
site inspections).
N/A.
Enforcement costs
for business
registers
Adjustment costs for
other public
authorities
Score 1-5
1
2
114
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0119.png
BENEFITS FOR SOCIETY AT LARGE (i.e. CONSUMERS)
Fight against fraud
Score 1-5
and abuse
3
4
Enhanced ex-ante controls of company data would ensure more accuracy and
correctness of information in business registers, which would contribute to making
it easier to identify companies which are used for fraudulent or abusive purposes or
persons under the sanctions. As explained above, option 3b would also ensure that
all Member States implement the revised FATF recommendation 24.
Having more reliable company data would contribute to making it easier to
interconnect administrations cross-border but it would not have a decisive impact.
The objective of these policy options is to ensure reliability of company data in
business registers and thus enhance trust between Member States. Enhanced trust will
facilitate cross-border business and access to other Member States’ markets. These
measures will also contribute creating more reliable legal framework that provides
legal certainty for companies and other stakeholders while contributing to the fight
against abuse. More reliable data will also help consumers to trust companies from
other Member States. Overall, these measures contribute to the creation of a more
integrated and digitalised Single Market. However, given that there is an overlap with
other impacts in this table, the scoring is not counted twice.
Digital economy
Functioning of the
internal market
Score 1-5
1
1
115
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0120.png
Policy options to enable direct use of company data from business registers in cross-border situations
Policy Option 4a - Requirement to apply once-only principle (no resubmission of company information) when a company from a Member
State sets up subsidiaries or branches in other Member States
Policy Option 4b – Option 4a + harmonised company extract containing a common set of company data and mutual recognition
principle for certain company data
Policy Option 4c - Option 4b + abolition of formalities e.g. apostille
Unit
measurement
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESSES
Trust and
transparency in the
market
Score 1-5
2
3
3
These policy options build on in particular the policy options 3 which will
make company data more reliable. When Member States (including business
registers) trust each other and that the company data in other Member States
is correct, there is no need for double submission of documents when cross-
border subsidiaries and branches. The policy option 4b and 4c will score
higher than 4a because they will bring direct benefits to the businesses
thanks to the increased trust between Member States and in particular their
business registers.
These policy options will remove an important administrative burden and
thus facilitate the expansion of companies to other Member States’ markets
by setting up cross-border subsidiaries (new company) and branches (new
fixed establishment). Every year, this would concern around 4.000 new
cross-boder subsidiaries and 4.500 new cross-border branches. In additon,
the PO4b and PO4c will also remove an important administrative burden by
abolishing costly formalities (see below) on cross-border activities and
operations and thus easing the doing of business cross-border. This will help
in particular SMEs to set up subsidiaries and branches but also reduce
of PO 4a
PO 4b
PO 4c
Comments
Ease of doing
business and access
to the market
Score 1-5
3
4
5
116
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0121.png
formalities in all their cross-border activities (be it cross-border trade,
services, cross-border sub-contracting etc. As to the SMEs which represent
98-99% of limited liability companies in the EU, around 40% of SMEs are
engaged in cross-border activities. For companies replying to the supporting
study surveys, the first benefit of the application of the once-only-principle
would be an easier cross-border expansion of SMEs (22% of replying
companies).
The policy option 4c will have the highest impact.
Administrative
burden reduction
(annual savings
companies)
Score 1-5
Standard
Cost
for Model calculation
(euro’s)
1
€7.535.
315
(recurre
nt/annu
al)
These measures would bring substantial annual (recurrent) savings in
administrative burden for companies. Companies would already save
€329.3 €437.2 substantially by the introduction of once-only-principle for setting up of
82.526 62.073 cross-border subsidiaries and branches as they would not have to submit any
documents about a parent company and therefore would not need to translate
(recurre (recurre and legalise/apostille those. Benefits would be even higher with introduction
nt/annu nt/annu of a free multilingual common company extract under PO4b which would
al)
al)
also remove need for certified translations and which companies can use in
cross-border activities be it in the context of cross-border trade, services,
public procurement. And the benefits would be highest under 4c as then also
the apostille needed in cross-border situations (e.g. on company extracts)
would also not be needed.
The obligation on authorities and courts to recognise certain company data
(beyond that included in the common extract) publically disclosed in other
Member States’ registers under PO4b would mean that national registers,
authorities or courts would be obliged to accept information from another
Member State’s register as an equivalent of what is required domestically. In
practice, this option would mean that authorities and courts could consult
company information directly in business register and BRIS, and the
company would not be required to resubmit the existing information again
(so application of
de-facto
once-only principle) which would in turn result in
4
5
117
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0122.png
burden reduction on companies;
In the surveys and workshop for the supporting study and in interviews with
stakeholders, companies particularly welcomed the abolishing of formalities
such as an apostille especially in the context of setting up of cross-border
subsidiaries and branches, cross-border procedures with tax authorities and
cross-border public procurement.
Moreover, to overcome difficulties related to obtaining the extracts
including apostille, companies may rely on private service providers. The
cost of such services varies but, generally, ranges between €180 and €350.
COSTS FOR BUSINESSES
Administrative
burden increase
-
-
-
N/A
BENEFITS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS/PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Operational cost
savings for business
registers
Score 1-5
2
2
2
The use of the once-only principle for setting up cross-border
subsidiaries/branches between business registers under option 1a, which are
part of BRIS (cross-border operation function of BRIS), would mean that
business registers would receive the necessary documents directly from
other registers and would not have to ask for and examine additional
documents from companies, which, in turn, should result in cost savings in
particular in time and handling of company information.
In the supporting study survey, the responding business registers considered
that the implementation of the once-only principle would increase
administrative costs (36%) but a significant share also expected a decline in
costs (28%); and views were mixed for common company extract, with 36%
expecting a small cost increase, 14% a significant one, and 19% - a cost
reduction. There was an overall expectation among business registers
118
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0123.png
participating in the supporting study workshop of a small increase in
administrative costs for both measures but the benefits were generally
assumed to be much greater than the costs.
Operational cost
savings for public
authorities
Score 1-5
-
2
3
Introducing the use of the once-only principle for setting up cross-border
subsidiaries/branches would apply between business registers which are part
of BRIS (cross-border operation function of BRIS). However, other
authorities would benefit from the mutual recognition of company data and
they can thus accept information from another Member State’s register as an
equivalent of what is required domestically and they could consult company
information directly in business register and BRIS. This would result in cost
savings in particular in time and resources of handling company information.
There would also be savings from the common company extract as public
authorities would not have to ask for and examine additional documents.
Similar to the costs of reducing formalities, nearly all stakeholder groups are
mainly anticipating a decline in costs to some extent (41% overall). This
view is mostly prevalent amongst business/financial organisations (100%),
public authorities (72%) and legal practitioners (60%).
The majority of business/financial organisations (100%), public authorities
(66%) and legal practitioners (60%) anticipate that this measure would
diminish their administrative costs.
Finally, public administrations also face difficulties when applying the
requirements of legalisation/apostille. This further increases the
disproportionate costs and time caused by the related procedures. Although
there are some Member States that issue apostilles immediately, the majority
of Member States need one working week. Therefore although public
authorities in charge of issuing apostille will face loss of revenue due to
abolishing the apostille (fees), the overall savings should be positive. For
example, in another context, it has been estimated that by abolishing the
apostille, the administrative burdens for the public authorities would be
119
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0124.png
reduced by € 5-7 million annually
164
.
COSTS FOR BUSINESS REGISTERS/PUBLIC AUTHORITIES
Adjustment costs for
Score 1-5
business registers
IT
development
costs for BRIS
Concerning the costs that will incur on business registers due to
implementation of measures under these options, business registers’ views
were varied. Business registers surveyed mostly answered that reducing
formalities would have no impact at all on the adjustment costs (23%) or had
2.7
2.7
2.7
no opinion at all (23%). At the same time, 32% indicated that the costs will
million million million increase to a certain extent, whereas 23% expect either a small or significant
IT
IT
IT
decrease. These results are also consistent with the responses from the
develop develop develop workshop: adjustment costs were projected to have no impact compared to
ment
ment
ment
the current situation (median of 0 on a scale of -5 to +5).
cost
cost
cost
(100.00 (100.00 (100.00 However, it is to be assumed that the option 4a which introduces the
implementation of the once-only principle in BRIS (i.e. between business
0 per
0 per
0 per
registers and BRIS) will amount to similar costs as those related to the
MS)
MS)
MS)
(one-off
(one-
(one- implementation earlier exchanges between business registers through BRIS.
This also confirmed by participant business registers in the workshop:
cots)
off
off
overall expectation of a small increase in adjustment costs, which is mostly
cots)
cots)
Loss of
thought to originate from investments in software rather than the costs of
Loss of
revenue of
revenue of
staff training. Therefore, on that basis, it is estimated that option 4a will
Loss of
EUR
EUR
revenue of
incur average cost of 2.7 million euros to business registers. The IT costs are
40.930 per
7.924.183
EUR
year
considered the same for all options because the difference is considered to
per year
7.924.183
per year
be minor. However, this is one-off cost due to the implementation of the
option 4a. In addition, option 4a will imply that companies setting up cross-
border subsidiaries and branches (in 8186 cases) do not need an extract.
Therefore, under option 4a, the business registers will have a loss of revenue
of 40.930 EUR per year.
1
2
2
164
SWD(2013) 144 final
120
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0125.png
In addition, options 4b and 4c introduce a common extract which is
calculated to be free of charge for 10% of limited liability companies (i.e.
1.5 million companies) once per year and it will amount to loss of revenue of
EUR 7,924, 183 per year. In the workshop, the participating business
registers expected a small increase of adjustment costs with a median of +1.
The advantages of introducing a common company extract will far outweigh
the adjustment costs.
Adjustment costs for
Score 1-5
other
public
authorities
1
Loss of
revenue
of EUR
73,668
per year
Under option 4a, the authorities in charge of issuing apostille will have loss
of revenue of 73,668(apostille in 6,139cases) per year, and the same under
Loss of Loss of option 4c (as in 4a). Under option 4c, the loss of revenue will be EUR
revenue revenue 9,533,571 for public authorities issuing the apostille (apostille in 788,325
of EUR of EUR cases in addition to option 4b) per year.
73,668 9,533,5
per
71 per
year
year
2
2
BENEFITS FOR SOCIETY AT LARGE (i.e. CONSUMERS)
Fight against fraud
Score 1-5
and abuse
2
3
3
Digital economy
Score 1-5
3
4
4
Given that the formalities of legalisation/apostille, certified translations are
considered outdated and not necessarily prevent fraud and forgery
165
, the
measures under these options will take into account and use existing
obligation under EU company law, in particular the use of trust services and
use of certified electronic copies to ensure the safe use and transmission of
data in order to fight against fraud and abuse. In addition, the co-operation
mechanisms in BRIS ensures close co-operation between Member States and
channels of communication in case of suspicion of fraud.
These measures will have a strong impact on digitalisation as they will
introduce once-only principle on a cross-border basis, in particular for
setting up subsidiaries and branches cross-border. The digital common
165
SWD (2013) 144final
121
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0126.png
company extract would further increase the benefits. The aim of the
initiative is also to enhance cross-border cooperation in particular between
business registers (more connected public authorities) in the Single Market
and at the same time, to make it easier for SMEs to expand cross-border.
Around one-quarter of all respondents to the surveys for the supporting
study saw the more connected public services at EU level as the 2
nd
most
important benefit of enabling cross-border use of company data in
administrative procedures (27% of business registers, 26% of public
authorities, 23% of legal practitioners and 20% of companies). (and 1/5 for
court proceedings).
Functioning of the
internal market
The aim of these options is to contribute to the creation of a more integrated
and digitalised Single Market by building on the “first hand” information
about companies in business registers and their interconnection at EU level.
They will reduce legal uncertainty, costs and lengthy procedures caused by
the burdensome and costly administrative formalities and thus facilitate the
exercise of internal market freedoms by companies, in particular SMEs.
These options will introduce once-only principle (no double submission of
documents) for setting up subsidiaries and branches. In addition, the planned
initiative would encourage more authorities (e.g. tax authorities) to use the
company data directly from the business registers and BRIS and thus reduce
the burden on companies by extending - de facto - the application of once-
only principle (i.e. companies would not need to submit the information to
authorities because authorities would access directly the information in the
business registers). The initiative would also lay down the foundations for
more connected public administrations cross-border in the Single Market by
making it possible to connect other EU level systems/registers to BRIS. This
would contribute to complementing the Single Market, in particular for
digital as called by the European Council conclusions of 24-25 March 2022.
However, given that there is an overlap with other impacts in this table, the
scoring is not counted twice.
122
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0127.png
2.4. C
OHERENCE OF THE POLICY OPTIONS
Policy options 1 to make more company information available in business
registers and/or BRIS
Policy option 1a - Make information about partnerships and third country company
branches available in BRIS
Policy option 1b - Option 1a + make information about group structures and
ownership available in national registers and BRIS
Policy option 1c - Option 1b + make information about place of management and
place of the main economic activity available in national registers and BRIS
PO1b
PO1c
Motivation
Unit
of PO1a
measurement
Score 1-5
3
4
5
Internal coherence: Options 1a, 1b and 1 c are all
coherent and mutually complementary with the other
components (policy options) of the initiative. In
particular, the more company data is made available
(options1) and more reliable the data is (options 3),
more the use of such data under options 4 can be
facilitated and enhanced. Interconnection of relevant
data through connection of different EU systems under
options 2 will also provide an easier access to wider
company data and thus complement the options under 1.
Option 1c ensures the most coherence as it provides the
most company data that can be consulted through
interconnection with other systems under option 2 and
used under option 4.
External coherence: The options all ensure coherence
with relevant EU law and other EU initiatives. Option
1c ensures the most coherence.
In particular, these options are all fully coherent with
the EU rules and international standards in the area of
the anti-money laundering/countering the financing of
terrorism, respectively the AML Directive and the
FATF standards (in particular with Recommendation 24
as amended in March 2022). More company data
available (partnerships, information on groups,
information on place of management and main
economic activity) facilitates the implementation of
anti-money laundering/ countering the financing of
terrorism rules, correctness of beneficial ownership data
as well as authorities’ work to abuse of corporate
entities. The options are also coherent with initiative on
the
European single access point
(ESAP) for financial
market information, as ESAP focuses mainly on entity
123
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0128.png
and product related information that is relevant mainly
for investors, with the purpose of serving market needs.
The Open Data Directive regulates the re-use of data
held by Member States’ public authorities for
commercial or non-commercial purposes, which is not
covered by the planned initiative. This initiative will
contribute to objectives of the various recent initiatives
on
taxation,
as transparency will help tax authorities’
work when in need of reliable company data. In
particular, information on groups and place of
management and economic activity will be valuable
data for taxation.
Policy options 2 to interconnect BRIS with other systems and enable better searches
Policy option 2a – Interconnection of BRIS with beneficial ownership registers
interconnection system (BORIS), use of EUID (European unique company
identifier), new search functionalities in BRIS
Policy option 2b - Option 2a + Interconnection with Insolvency Registers
interconnection system (IRI)
PO2b
5
Motivation
Internal coherence: Options 2 are coherent and complementary
to other policy options, in particular to options 1 (as explained
above), but also with options 3 and 4. In particular, the use of
EUID as company identifier enables the unequivocal
identification of the company. It can connect the company
information in different registers, but it also connects
companies and their cross-border branches and can be used to
connect parent companies and their subsidiaries. It thus helps
to implement policy options 3 and also the use of company
data in cross-border situations (when setting up subsidiaries
and branches and for other administrative procedures).
External coherence: These policy options are fully coherent
with the relevant anti-money laundering rules (beneficial
owners’ transparency and registers) and with insolvency rules.
Unit
of PO2a
measurement
Score 1-5
4
Policy options 3 to ensure an adequate verification of company data before it is
entered into the business register
Policy Option 3a - obligation to check a harmonised list of elements
Policy Option 3b – Option 3a + common basic procedural requirements for
ensuring reliable and up-to-date data
124
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0129.png
Unit
of PO3a
measurement
Score 1-5
4
PO3b
4
Motivation
Internal coherence: Options 3 are pre-requisite for making the
available data under options 1 more reliable and facilitating its
cross-border use without burdensome formalities under options
4. Having more reliable company data in business registers will
bring more trust and more legal certainty in the market and
between Member States which lays down the foundations for its
cross-border use. The policy options are therefore fully
coherent and complementary.
External coherence: These options, in particular Option 3b is
coherent with the international standard in the anti-money
laundering field, in particular with FATF recommendation 24,
which requires registration of all companies in business registers
and availability of basic information about companies. These
options also ensure that the company data is adequate, accurate
and up-to-date. Finally, in particular option 3b contributes to all
initiatives on taxation, the current sanctions against Russia and
Belorussia and, in general, to all areas (e.g. social policy,
transportation) where trustworthy company data is needed.
Policy options to enable direct use of company data from business registers in cross-
border situations
Policy Option 4a - Requirement to apply once-only principle (no resubmission of
company information) when a company from a Member State sets up subsidiaries
or branches in other Member States
Policy Option 4b – Option 4a + harmonised company extract containing a common
set of company data and mutual recognition principle for certain company data
Policy Option 4c - Option 4b + abolition of formalities e.g. apostille
PO4b
PO4c
Motivation
Unit
of PO4a
measurement
Score 1-5
3
4
5
Internal coherence: these options are in particular
complementary to and dependent on options 3. The
facilitation of cross-border use of company data will
depend on the trust of such data and trust between
Member States. These options are thus fully coherent
with the other elements of the proposal.
External coherence: these options, in particular option 4c
contribute to the objective of the Communication 2030
Digital Compass: the European way for the Digital
Decade to provide online key public services online for
European businesses. It also contributes to removing
125
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0130.png
remaining unjustified barriers and administrative burdens
in the Single Market as described in the European
Council conclusions of 24-25 March 2022. The initiative
pursues the objective of the Public Documents
Regulation by removing unnecessary formalities (such as
apostilles) for companies in cross-border situations,
similarly to how it was achieved by that Regulation for
citizens. Finally, there is no coherence issue with the
Single Digital Gateway Regulation which provides for
online cross-border administrative procedures but
excludes from its scope company law procedures.
2.5. O
VERVIEW OF THE ASSESSMENT OF THE OPTIONS
2.5.1 Multi-criteria Analysis
To compare the policy options in their relative impacts, we have performed a Multi-
Criteria Analysis (MCA). As it is an integrative framework, the MCA allows us to include
all retained policy options and assess them against the identified impacts. To build up the
analysis we have relied on the following two components:
1) The scores assigned to each Policy Option against the impacts. The scoring system
is represented on a scale 0-5 and it is based on the in-depth analysis of the available
evidence of the impacts
2) The weights assigned to each impact represent the relative importance assigned to
them. As, for example, a score of 3 for the administrative burden imposed on
businesses (which is a one-off cost) is not equal to a score of 3 for the adjustment
for the business registers (which is a recurring cost), these can be set-off by the
weight assigned to each impact. So the weights are impacted by the stakeholders
that they are related to the nature of the impact (one-off or recurrent) and the link to
the policy objectives. To ensure robustness, we have taken two approaches in the
distribution of weights:
a. Approach 1: A weight of 30% for Effectiveness, 60% for Efficiency and
10% for Coherence. Under this approach we assume efficiency gains are the
ultimate goal of the initiative and a higher weight ensures these constitute
the focal point in our analysis.
i.
From the 60% of efficiency, 25% is assigned to the costs. The three
groups of stakeholders that will support the costs are assigned
proportional weights: a higher weight for the costs supported by the
Business registers as these costs will be recurring, the burden being
higher than for the businesses, which will only incur one-off
administrative burdens. Moreover, the costs imposed on the businesses
are likely to be offset in a few years by the recurring benefits, that will
continue to flow even after the off-set time, and thus, the significance of
the impact is slightly lower. The burden imposed on the public
126
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0131.png
authorities is assigned the lowest importance, as the impact on the
public authorities is not likely to be very significant
ii. The remainder of the 35% is assigned to the benefits. As mentioned
above, efficiency gains are the ultimate goal of the initiative, the cost at
which they are achieved being of slightly less relevance. As the
efficiency gains are enjoyed by the businesses (and less by the Business
registers and the society), the highest weight (25%) is assigned to the
reduced Administrative Burden for them, as well as the trust and
transparency they will benefit from, and the ease of doing business that
they will experience as a consequence of the initiative
b. Approach 2: An alternative approach for the distribution of weights is to
assign equal weights to Effectiveness and Efficiency (45% for each) and the
remaining 10% for coherence.
i. The logic behind the specific distribution of weights among the
stakeholder and impacts is identical to the first approach. What we
notice is that the results of the MCA hold even after these weights have
been changed to ensure equal significance for the effectiveness and
efficiency.
3) The total weighed score for each policy option are calculated as the scores of each
policy options against the identified impacts, multiplied by the weight assigned to
each specific impact. The weighted performance of the costs is subtracted from the
benefits. All policy options lead to a net benefit, indicating that the benefits
outweigh the costs.
a. Under the first scenario (30-60-10), we observe that from the first package
of Policy Options, it is option 1c that scores highest in the MCA. From the
second package it is Option 2b, from the third package it is option 3b and
from the fourth package, it is option 4c.
b. Zooming in and looking at the individual weighed scores, positive scores
can be observed in terms of effectiveness, coherence, and efficiency for the
businesses and the society, and a slight efficiency loss for the Business
registers. In other words, the sizeable efficiency gains experienced by the
businesses come at a small cost for the Business registers.
c. When we look at the results per stakeholder (businesses, business registers
and society as a whole) we can see that businesses and society always
experience a net benefit, and that business registers have a mixed result. In
other words, there will be a trade-off between businesses and society on the
one hand and the business registers on the other hand.
d. Under the second scenario (45-45-10), the results hold. The same policy
options (as under the first scenario) are the preferred options in each
scenario, this time with even higher scores. The main change observed is a
reduction in the losses of the BR, as compared to the first scenario. This
means that the benefits enjoyed by the business and the society come at a
slightly lower cost than under the first scenario.
127
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0132.png
First scenario
30-60-10
Weight
EFFECTIVENESS
(30)
SO1: More reliable
company
data
available in BR
and/or BRIS
SO2:
Enabling
cross-border use of
company
information in BR
EFFICIENCY
(60)
Benefits for businesses
Trust
and
transparency in the
market
Ease
of
doing
business and access
to the market
Administrative
burden reduction
Costs for businesses
Administrative
burden
increase(one-off
cost)
Savings related to
operational costs
Savings related to
operational cost for
other
public
authorities
8,33%
0
2
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15%
2
3
5
3
4
3
4
1
2
2
PO1a
PO1b
PO1c
PO2a
PO2b
PO3a
PO3b
PO4a
PO4b
PO4c
15%
1
2
3
2
2
2
4
3
4
5
7,50%
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
2
3
3
7,50%
10,00%
1
0
2
0
2
0
1
1
1
1
2
0
3
0
3
1
4
4
5
5
Benefits for Business Registers
2,50%
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
Benefits for other public authorities
2,50%
2
3
3
2
3
3
4
0
2
3
Costs for business registers/public authorities
Adjustment
costs
for
business
5,56%
2
2
2
0
0
2
2
1
2
2
128
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0133.png
registers
Enforcement costs
for
business
registers
Adjustment
costs
for other public
authorities
5,56%
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
5,56%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
2
Benefits for society at large (i.e. consumers)
Fight against fraud
and abuse
Digital economy
Functioning of the
internal market
COHERENCE
(10)
Coherence
TOTAL
10%
100,00%
3
1,013889
4
1,455556
5
1,93056
4
1,733333
5
2,125
4
1,525
4
2,13611
3
1,397222
4
2,219444
5
2,66944
1,67%
1,67%
1,67%
2
1
0
3
2
0
4
2
0
2
3
0
3
3
0
3
1
0
4
1
0
2
3
0
3
4
0
3
4
0
Effectiveness
Efficiency
Coherence
Total
30%
60%
10%
100%
0,450
0,264
0,300
1,014
0,750
0,306
0,400
1,456
1,200
0,231
0,500
1,931
0,750
0,583
0,400
1,733
0,900
0,725
0,500
2,125
0,750
0,375
0,400
1,525
1,200
0,536
0,400
2,136
0,600
0,497
0,300
1,397
0,900
0,919
0,400
2,219
1,050
1,119
0,500
2,669
Effectiveness
Effiency
businesses
Efficiency BR
Efficiency PA
Efficiency
Society
Coherence
Total
30%
33%
13,61%
8,06%
5,00%
10%
100%
0,450
0,225
-0,061
0,050
0,050
0,300
1,014
0,750
0,208
-0,061
0,050
0,083
0,400
1,456
1,200
0,117
-0,061
0,050
0,100
0,500
1,931
0,750
0,400
0,050
0,050
0,083
0,400
1,733
0,900 0,750
0,475 0,375
-
0,075 0,092
0,075 0,075
0,100 0,067
0,500 0,400
2,125 1,525
1,200
0,525
-0,172
0,100
0,083
0,400
2,136
0,600
0,475
-0,006
-0,056
0,083
0,300
1,397
0,900
0,925
-0,061
-0,061
0,117
0,400
2,219
1,050
1,100
-0,061
-0,036
0,117
0,500
2,669
129
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0134.png
Efficiency
60%
Benefits
35%
Businesses
PA
Businesses
BR/PA
Society
8,3%
5,56%
25%
5,00%
5,00%
Trust
Ease of
Op.
Op.
Fight
AB
Adjustment Enforcement Adjustment &
doing
AB
Savings Savings against Digital Functioning
costs BR
costs BR
costs PA
transp. business reduction BR
PA
fraud
econ. int. Market
8,33%
5,56%
5,56%
5,56% 7,50%
7,50%
10,00%
2,50%
2,50% 1,67% 1,67%
1,67%
Effectiveness
30%
SO1
SO2
15%
15%
Coherence
10%
Costs
25%
BR
11,11%
Second scenario 45-45-10
Weight PO1a PO1b PO1c PO2a PO2b PO3a PO3b PO4a PO4b PO4c
EFFECTIVENESS
(45)
SO1: More reliable
company
data
22,50%
available in BR
and/or BRIS
SO2:
Enabling
cross-border use of
22,50%
company
information in BR
EFFICIENCY
(45)
Benefits for businesses
2
3
5
3
4
3
4
1
2
2
1
2
3
2
2
2
4
3
4
5
130
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0135.png
Trust
and
transparency in the
market
Ease
of
doing
business and access
to the market
Administrative
burden reduction
5,00%
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
2
3
3
5,00%
10,00%
1
0
2
0
2
0
1
1
2
1
2
0
3
0
3
1
4
4
5
5
6,67%
Administrative
burden
6,67%
increase(one-off
cost)
Benefits for Business Registers
Savings related to
operational costs
1,25%
0
2
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
Benefits for other public authorities
Savings related to
operational cost for
1,25%
2
other
public
authorities
Costs for business registers/public authorities
Adjustment costs
for
business
registers
Enforcement costs
for
business
registers
Adjustment costs
for other public
authorities
Fight against fraud
and abuse
Digital economy
4,44%
2
3
3
2
3
3
4
0
2
3
2
2
0
0
2
2
1
2
2
4,44%
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
4,44%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
2
Benefits for society at large (i.e. consumers)
0,83%
0,83%
2
1
3
2
4
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
4
1
2
3
3
4
3
4
131
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0136.png
Functioning of the
internal market
COHERENCE
(10)
Coherence
TOTAL
0,83%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10%
100,00%
3
1,111
4
1,657
5
2,357
4
1,917
5
2,375
4
1,725
4
2,489
3
1,528
4
2,431
5
2,918
Effectiveness
Efficiency
Coherence
Total
45%
45%
10%
100%
0,68
0,14
0,30
1,11
1,13
0,13
0,40
1,66
1,80
0,06
0,50
2,36
1,13
0,39
0,40
1,92
1,35
0,53
0,50
2,38
1,13
0,20
0,40
1,73
1,80
0,29
0,40
2,49
0,90
0,33
0,30
1,53
1,35
0,68
0,40
2,43
1,58
0,84
0,50
2,92
Effectiveness
Effiency
businesses
Efficiency BR
Efficiency PA
Efficiency Society
Coherence
Total
45%
27%
10,14%
5,69%
2,50%
10%
100%
0,68
0,15
-0,06
0,03
0,03
0,30
1,11
1,13
0,12
-0,06
0,04
0,04
0,40
1,66
1,80
0,03
-0,06
0,04
0,05
0,50
2,36
1,13
0,30
0,03
0,03
0,04
0,40
1,92
1,35
0,40
0,04
0,04
0,05
0,50
2,38
1,13
0,25
-0,12
0,04
0,03
0,40
1,73
1,80
0,35
-0,15
0,05
0,04
0,40
2,49
0,90
0,35
-0,02
-0,04
0,04
0,30
1,53
1,35
0,75
-0,06
-0,06
0,06
0,40
2,43
1,58
0,90
-0,06
-0,05
0,06
0,50
2,92
Efficiency
45%
Costs
20,0%
Businesses
BR
PA
6,67%
8,89%
4,44%
Adjustment Enforcement Adjustment Trust
AB
costs BR
costs BR
costs PA
&
Benefits
25,0%
Businesses
BR/PA
Society
20,00%
2,50%
2,50%
Ease of AB
Op.
Op.
Fight
Digital Functioning
doing
reduction Savings Savings against econ. int. Market
132
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0137.png
transp. business
6,67%
4,44%
4,44%
4,44%
Coherence
10%
SO2
22,50%
5,00%
5,00%
10,00%
BR
1,25%
PA
1,25%
fraud
0,83%
0,83%
0,83%
Effectiveness
45%
SO1
22,50%
133
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0138.png
2.5.2 Sensitivity analysis
The administrative burdens imposed or reduced by the various policy option are calculated by
applying the Standard Cost Model. In order to verify the robustness of our initial SCM results, we
have performed
12 partial sensitivities
in which we varied the following parameters:
1.
The cost of making the information on the structure of group, parent company, place of
management and place of economic activity
a.
If the out-of-pocket costs is
€10 instead of €20,
the administrative burden for the policy
options under Package 4 does not change. The administrative burden for options 1b and
1c
decreases by approximately 45%
b.
If the cost is
€30 instead of €20,
only the administrative burden for policy options
1b and 1c
increases by approximately 45%
The number of LLCs:
a.
If the number of LLCs
decreases by 10%,
the burden imposed by policy option 1c
and 4b and 4c will decrease by approximately 10%
b.
Conversely, if the number of LLCs
increases by 10%
the burden imposed by policy
options 1c, 4b and 4c will increase by approximately 10%
Number of branches:
a.
If the number of branches
decreases by 10%,
the administrative burden imposed by
option 4a decreases by approximately
5.5%,
that of option 4b by approximately
0.1%
and that of option 4c by less than
0.1%
b.
In a similar fashion, if the number of branches
increases by 10%,
the administrative
burden imposed by option 4a increases by approximately
5.5%,
that of option 4b by
approximately
9.7%
and that of option 4c by less than
0.1%
Tariff lawyer:
a.
If the tariff of a lawyer for setting up a subsidiary decreases from
€350
to €150, the
burden imposed by option 4a decreases by
21.7%,
that of option 4b by
approximately
0.5%
and that of option 4c by
0.37%
b.
If the tariff increases from €350 to €500, the burden under option 4a decreases by
16%, under 4b by
0.37%
and under 4c by
0.28%
c.
If the tariff of a lawyer for assisting in filing an extract changes from €150 to €300,
the burden imposed by option 4b will increase by approximately
36%,
and that
imposed by 4c will increase by
40%
The number of companies that request extracts annually:
a.
If the number decreases from
10% to 5%,
the burden under 4a decreases by
31%
and under 4c by approximately
37%
b.
If the number increases from
10% to 20%
the burden imposed by 4a increases by
62%
and that imposed by 4c increases by a staggering
71%
Number of pages that need to be translated
a.
If the number of extract pages that need to be translated increases from
3 to 5,
the
burden imposed by option 4a increases by
5.3%,
that imposed by option 4b
increases by
23.8%
and that imposed by option 4c increases by approximately
18%.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
We observe thus, that options 1b and 1c are significantly sensitive if the filing cost for an extract
would change and option 1c is moderately sensitive to changes in the number of LLCs. However,
even with the higher filing costs, the option c is still a net positive to society and the preferred
option.
134
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0139.png
The policy options under package 4, especially options 4b and 4c show limited sensitivity if the
number of branches or the tariff for a lawyer for setting up a subsidiary would change, but quite a
significant sensitivity if the tariff for a lawyer for assisting in filing an extract, or if the number of
companies that request extracts annually would change. A more limited impact would be generated
by a change in the number of pages that need to be translated for an extract. Irrespective of the
changes in the basic assumptions, option 4c still remains a net positive to society and the preferred
option. This shows robustness of the results and that even though the assumptions (which are
carefully deliberated) can change significantly and not impacting the outcome.
Policy Option
Sensitivit
y analysis
1a
1b
643.10
5
351.88
8
934.32
3
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
643.10
5
1c
311.413.15
7
170.339.62
2
452.281.06
5
279.974.41
3
342.646.27
4
311.413.15
7
311.413.15
7
311.413.15
7
311.413.15
7
311.413.15
7
311.413.15
7
311.413.15
7
311.413.15
7
4a
7.535.31
5
7.535.31
5
7.535.31
5
7.535.31
5
7.535.31
5
7.121.08
5
7.949.54
6
5.898.11
5
8.763.21
5
7.535.31
5
7.535.31
5
7.535.31
5
7.941.13
6
4b
329.849.29
0
329.849.29
0
329.849.29
0
297.522.74
8
361.964.39
9
329.329.34
3
330.157.80
4
328.106.37
4
330.971.47
4
447.992.36
9
227.261.28
5
534.708.15
2
408.311.84
8
4c
437.885.29
1
437.885.29
1
437.885.29
1
394.723.25
7
480.765.02
2
437.329.90
9
438.158.37
0
436.106.94
0
438.972.04
0
615.117.33
2
281.261.56
8
750.709.28
4
516.312.41
4
Basis scenario
/
1
Filing cost = 10 euro
/
2
Filing cost = 30 euro
/
3
LLC -10%
/
4
LLC +10%
/
5
#branches -10%
/
6
#branches +10%
/
7
Lawyer cost setting up
= 150 euro/hour
/
Lawyer cost setting up
= 500euro/hour
/
Lawyer cost for extract
= 300
/
5%
of
companies
request
extract
annually
/
20% of companies
request
extract
annually
/
8
9
10
11
12
5 pages translation
brighter colours = values change
/
135
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0140.png
A
NNEX
5: I
NTERVENTION LOGIC
Policy options are addressing the drivers (i.e. causes of the problems) in order to meet the specific objectives and the general objectives:
PROBLEM DRIVERS
Limited
functionalities
in BRIS (e.g.
search facilities,
no
interconnection
with other
interconnection
systems)
PROBLEMS
SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES
GENERAL OBJECTIVES
POLICY OPTIONS
Different
intensity
and
procedures
in Member
States to
verify the
correctness
of
company
data before
entered in
business
registers
Company data
dispersed in
different
places or not
available in
business
registers
and/or cross-
border
through BRIS
Company data
originating
from other
Member
States’
business
registers not
recognised
cross-border
and subject to
formalities
Reliable company data
not sufficiently available
and/or comparable
cross-border
Increasing the
amount and
improving the
reliability of
company data
available in
business registers
and/or BRIS
Enhanced
transparency and
trust in the business
environment
Policy options 1:
Making
more company data
available in business
registers and/or BRIS
Direct use of company
data hindered/not
possible
-
Divergent
company
extracts
when setting up
cross-border
branches/
subsidiaries
in all cross-border
activities and
situations including
administrative and
court procedures
More digitalised and
connected cross-
border public
services for
companies
-
Enabling direct use
of company data
available in business
registers when
setting up cross-
border
branches/subsidiari
es and in other
cross-border
activities and
situations
Easier cross-border
expansion for SMEs
More
Integra
ted
and
Digitali
sed
Single
Market
Policy options 2:
Interconnecting BRIS with
other systems and
enabling better searches
Policy options 3:
Ensuring
adequate verification of
company data before it is
entered into the business
registers
More effective EU
action against abuse
and fraud
Policy options 4:
Enabling
direct use of company data
from business registers in
cross-border situations
136
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
A
NNEX
6: N
UMBER OF COMPANIES
, B
RANCHES AND SUBSIDIARIES
The calculations are based on three different sources:
Business register’s data (2022)
Figures from Mutual evaluation reports of FATF and MONEYVAL (2014-2022) for those
Member States where those reports/figures exist
ORBIS database (2022)
Where it was available, the number is based on the business register’s data. In other cases, the data
is based either on the FATF/MONEYVAL data or on ORBIS data. The various sources were
compared to verify if the data is plausible. To be noted that the numbers are dynamic as every day
new companies are created and cease to exist. Therefore, it is never possible to give a precise
figure, this data is an estimation based on available information.
The Eurostat calculates the number of enterprises (i.e. groups calculated as one entity), thus, the
lower numbers. The Business Demography Statistics define enterprise as ‘the
smallest combination
of legal units that is an organisational unit producing goods or services, which benefits from a
certain degree of autonomy in decision-making, especially for the allocation of its current
resources. An enterprise carries out one or more activities at one or more locations’
1
. An
enterprise may thus be a sole legal unit but also a combination of legal units.
For partnerships the main types were considered (general and limited). Non-commercial or sector-
specific partnerships are not included. In certain cases, only the active partnerships were calculated,
where this information was available.
137
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0142.png
1. Number of limited liability companies in the European Union
Public limited companies
Member
State
ORBIS
Business
Register
FATF/
MONEYV
AL
166
Private limited companies
ORBIS
Business
Register
FATF/
MONEYV
AL
TOTAL (public + private)
ORBIS
Business
Register
FATF/
MONEYV
AL
Total used
for this IA
Most accurate
figure considered,
mainly the
business
registers’ data
Eurostat
EU-27
AT
BE
BG
HR
CY
CZ
DK
EE
FI
FR
DE
EL
HU
448.989
1.830
80.254
11.626
663
428
26.422
34.179
2.285
333
24.660
20.077
36.151
67
1.261
99.703
286
726
565
27.099
34.865
2.769
292
-
13.413
49.662
8.284
1.591
116.437
12.800
-
562
26.368
37.620
-
-
32.604
13.689
36.327
49
15.707.214
201.430
470.483
769.147
154 071
194.990
451.550
314.877
243.897
268.312
2.624.440
1.836.582
42 958
362.677
1.466.828
107.716
402.439
179.978
514.875
776.108
116.198
179.990
517.558
317.384
241.181
262.380
137.840
352.330
765.609
-
215.346
442.110
214.168
-
-
2.745.031
1.419.590
51.222
400.794
16.353.232
203260
550.737
780.773
154.734
195.418
477.972
349.056
246.182
268.645
2.649.100
1.856.659
79.109
362.744
181.239
614.578
776.394
116.924
180.555
544.657
352.249
243.950
262.672
-
1.480.241
157.378
410.723
139.431
468.767
778.409
133.596
215.908
468.478
251.788
-
275.006
2.777.635
1.433.279
87.549
400.843
15.771.679
181.239
614.578
776.394
116.924
180.555
544.657
352.249
243.950
262.672
2.777.635
1.480.241
157.378
410.723
9 432 410
105 253
416 485
285 113
108 636
37 822
279 705
133 122
85 026
175 768
2 344 125
624 689
83 658
244 028
166
The numbers for all Member States are not yet available. Some Member States are still undergoing their evaluations
138
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0143.png
IE
IT
LV
LT
LU
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SK
SI
ES
SE
1.195
34.651
935
33
30.699
235
3.262
8.511
27.183
7.004
7.011
564
86.112
2.619
917
27.830
966
5
32.392
597
4.440
-
29.927
10.308
50
464
56.902
2.068
1.716
46.824
1.015
372
41.384
555
4.935
9.546
32.654
-
7.367
705
185.125
-
240.957
1.199.540
120.877
38
77.797
52.144
1.064.310
449.754
560.019
1.221.277
309.474
78.785
1.890.991
702.866
254.526
1.282.101
131.858
5.846
74.461
49.493
1.140.033
-
616.550
1.307.886
315.803
72.258
977.711
702.171
218.220
1.545.718
163.847
124.122
51.026
48.129
1.121.871
446.732
365.590
-
262.218
70.245
2.298.912
-
242.152
1.234.191
121.812
71
108.496
52.379
1.067.572
458.265
587.202
1.228.281
316.485
79.349
1.977.103
705.485
255.443
1.309.931
132.824
5.851
106.853
50.090
1.144.473
-
646.477
1.318.194
315.853
72.722
1.034.613
704.239
219.936
1.592.542
164.862
124.494
92.410
48.684
1.126.806
456.278
398.244
-
269.585
70.950
2.484.037
548.854
255.443
1.309.931
132.824
124.494
106.853
50.090
1.144.473
456.278
646.477
1.318.194
315.853
72.722
1.034.613
704.239
123 691
915 602
82 432
75 918
29 469
12 765
295 787
184 941
370 978
513 921
197 370
58 047
1 191 693
456 366
139
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0144.png
2. Number of partnerships in the European Union
MS
EU-27
AT
BE
BG
HR
CY
CZ
DK
EE
FI
FR
DE
EL
HU
IE
IT
LV
LT
LU
ORBIS
4.202.916
73.940
111.883
10.066
1.352
6.659
10.529
26.264
7.641
37.357
2.244.589
95.594
68.921
106.348
215
520.753
2.014
46.353
18.103
Business
register
66.585
22.902
6.115
257
6.149
11.877
2.278
7.940
30.812
-
22.695
162.488
110.165
-
639.306
2.499
13
10.382
FATF/
MONEYVAL
167
61.723
41.584
6.272
231
6.568
7.137
25.865
-
37.892
64.570
251.690
52.796
144.000
1.416
154.315
727
152
992
Total used for
this IA
1.743.628
66.585
22.902
6.115
257
6.149
11.877
26.264
7.940
30.812
64.570
251.690
162.488
110.165
1.416
639.306
2.499
152
10.382
Eurostat
1 938 372
46 867
64 081
8593
845
99
5354
13010
627
24238
35254
388477
122456
85446
9941
612274
2210
986
1088
167
The numbers for all Member States are not yet available. Some Member States are still undergoing their evaluations
140
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0145.png
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SK
SI
ES
SE
49
234.621
203.612
4.754
6.458
3.047
2.043
252.668
107.083
1.469
200.466
-
1.103
2.411
2.542
399
2.000
50.054
1.284
205.364
43.292
1.195
-
2.420
1.116
17.491
68.377
1.469
200.466
43.292
1.103
2.411
2.542
399
2.000
68.377
1753
169213
60326
5921
2 845
1909
1885
216639
216639
141
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0146.png
3. Number of newly created EU subsidiaries in 2021
EU-27
AT
BE
BG
CY
CZ
DE
DK
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
HR
HU
IE
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SE
SI
SK
3 686
208
188
23
89
93
707
164
32
12
142
58
460
3
11
72
207
14
525
3
63
215
35
31
14
269
10
38
4. Number of new cross-border
branches created in one year in
selected countries (2008)
BG
CZ
DK
EE
IE
CY
LT
LU
HU
MT
AT
PL
RO
SI
SL
FI
SE
239
297
171
33
196
95
42
103
147
36
371
232
164
18
194
121
534
Source: Impact Assessment on BRIS 2012
Source: Supporting study
142
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0147.png
A
NNEX
7: E
STIMATED COSTS
-
FOR ELECTRONIC COMPANY
EXTRACTS ACROSS THE
EU
Member
State
AT
BE
BG
CY
CZ
DE
DK
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
HR
HU
IE
Fees for an electronic company extracts in 2022, in EUR
3.76
13.5
2.56 for the first page, 1.02 for the following pages. With certificate: 1.28 for the first page,
0.77 for the following pages
20.0-40.0 (depending on the pace of the procedure)
Free of charge
Free of charge
Free of charge
Free of charge
5 for certified documents
Cost depends on the information provided. The average price is 8€
Free of charge since 1 August 2022 (no certificate available for pdf)
3.4
0.7
4.2 (for 3 pages) (for a private company)
2.50 per extract in pdf for non-certified
12.50 per extract in pdf for certified
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SE
SI
SK
5.0 - 15.0 (depending on the document/information)
40.0 (for a private company)
10.4 (electronic form) – 15.4 (electronic form with qualified signature)
Non-certified electronic extract is available for free. Only non-certified document available.
No electronic company extract. 0.0-20.0 (depending on the document/information, the
information does not seem to be contained in one document).
2.4 (uncertified) – 7.8 (certified)
Free of charge
5 Euros for certified online document. Non-certified document is not being provided.
0.4 euros for non-certified document, 0.8 euros for certified document
11.6
Free of charge
Free of charge
Note:
For non-euro countries, costs are converted in euro; all costs rounded to the nearest ten.
Source:
Study
on the
disclosure and cross-border use of company data, and digital developments related to company law,
Milieu Consulting
SRL, 2022, supplemented by results of the survey with business registers, 2022, DG JUST.
143
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0148.png
A
NNEX
8: E
STIMATED COSTS FOR APOSTILLES AND CERTIFIED
TRANSLATION ACROSS THE
EU M
EMBER
S
TATES
MS
AT
Apostille fee, in 2022, in EUR
14.4
13.7/15.5
17.50 /35.00
20.0
2.6
5.0
14.9
12.0/40.0
25.0 for documents issued by federal
authorities
For documents issued by state authorities it
varies depending on the Land.
28.2
26.8
Free of charge
0 – 7.5
30.0
Free of charge
4.0 – 8.0
13.5
10.0 - 100.0
16.0
10.0 - 20.0
20.0
15.0 - 30.0
15.0 - 20.0
22.0
13.00
10.2
0.0 – 7.1
Free of charge- 10.0
16.9
2.50/5.00
10.00
Estimated costs for certified/sworn
translation per page, in 2022, in EUR
55.0
BE
BG
CY
CZ
DE
31.5
24.3
25.0
20.2
56.0
DK
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
HR
HU
IE
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SE
SI
SK
55.0
38.5
18.6
45.0
35.0
52.0
19.6
25.0
24.0
50.0
25.0
37.0
18.5
24.0
52.2
12.0
42.0
17.5
44.5
30.0
15.0
Note:
For non-euro countries, costs are converted in euro. All costs are rounded to the nearest ten.
Source:
Study
on the disclosure and cross-border use of company data, and digital developments related to company
law,
Milieu Consulting SRL, 2022
144
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0149.png
A
NNEX
9: EU
RULES IN OTHER POLICY AREAS RELATED TO THIS
INITIATIVE
A number of other recent EU initatiatives are relevant for the initiatve on Upgrading
digital company law and will be complemented by it.
As regards transparency about companies, the
Anti-Money Laundering Directive
obliges Member States to ensure that corporate and other legal entities incorporated
within their territory obtain and hold adequate, accurate and current information on their
beneficial ownership, including the details of the beneficial interest held. In addition, the
AML Directive requires Member States to ensure that the beneficial ownership
information is held in a central register in each Member State, for example a commercial
register, companies register or a public register, and is made available to the public. On
20 July 2021, the European Commission presented a package of legislative proposals to
strengthen the EU’s anti-money laundering and countering the financing of terrorism
(AML/CFT) rules, in which the Commission proposed further harmonisation of
beneficial ownership information as part of a new draft AML Regulation. The links
between the company law initiative subject to this IA and the AML/CFT rules include
the planned interconnection of BRIS with the EU interconnection of beneficial ownership
registers and that both initiatives contribute to providing more transparency about
ownership of EU companies.
The
Regulation on Public Documents
(Regulation (EU) 2016/1191) ensures the free
circulation of public documents within the Union and, thereby, promoting the free
movement of Union citizens, simplifying the existing administrative requirements
relating to the presentation in a Member State of certain public documents issued by the
authorities of another Member State. The objective of the Regulations is to cut red tape
and costs for citizens in such situations. Amongst others, the Regulation stipulates that
public documents (for example, a birth certificate, a marriage notarial act, a judgment)
and their certified copies issued by the authorities of an EU country must be accepted as
authentic by the authorities of another EU country without the need of an authenticity
stamp (i.e. the apostille). However, this Regulation does not cover company documents
form the business registers.
The
Unshell initiative
168
, which lays down rules to prevent the misuse of entities for tax
purposes, is a proposal in the field of taxation, under negotiation by the co-legislator. The
main objective of this initiative is to ensure that undertakings lacking a minimal
substance for tax purposes are not used as instruments for tax evasion or tax avoidance.
To achieve this objective, it introduces reporting requirements for all undertakings that
do not meet the criteria set by this initiative combined with a presumption of minimal
substance and a possibility of rebuttal. It also provides for tax consequences, for an
automatic exchange of information between national tax authorities by making data
available on a Central Directory as well as potential request for the performance of a tax
audit. Although the scope and the objectives of both initiatives are different, they both
168
Proposal for a COUNCIL DIRECTIVE laying down rules to prevent the misuse of shell entities for tax
purposes and amending Directive 2011/16/EU
(COM/2021/565
final).
145
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0150.png
aim to contribute to prevention of abuse and fraud, including by letterbox companies.
The initiative subject to this IA may do this – and would complement the Unshell
initiative in this context - by making more company data available in business registers
and in BRIS and therefore, contributing to a more effective assessment of the criteria for
the minimal substance of companies.
As regards facilitating cross-border information or procedures, the
Single Digital
Gateway
facilitates online access to information, administrative procedures and
assistance services in another EU country. There is a clear distinction between the scope
of the
Single Digital Gateway Regulation (SDG)
169
and EU company law and the
current initiative. SDG explicitly excludes from its scope company law procedures (such
as formation of a company and filing) by companies or firms within the meaning of
Article 54 TFEU. Furthermore, the SDG is
lex generalis
covering general principles and
a wide range of administrative procedures while company law is
lex specialis
covering
company law procedures and company data in the business registers. Furthermore, the
proposal for the
European single access point
(ESAP)
170
for financial market
information (currently under negotiation by the co-legislator), focuses mainly on entity
and product related information that is relevant mainly for investors, with the purpose of
serving market needs. BRIS and ESAP have different intended users, accessing and using
different information in a different way. In addition, there are different collection bodies
with limited overlap on the data collected. The current initiative is complementary with
both, SDG and ESAP, as underlined in the CMU Action Plan specifically for ESAP and
BRIS.
As regards access to data, the
Open Data Directive
171
requires Member States’ public
authorities to provide access to data to the public for re-use. Annex I of the Directive
includes “Companies and company ownership” data among the high-value data sets that
Member States have to make available free of charge, provided as a bulk download and
in machine-readable format. The Implementing Regulation is being prepared to specify
which specific data has to be provided as high-value dataset. However, the scope and the
objective of the Open Data Directive is different than this initiative. The Open Data
Directive regulates the re-use of data held by Member States’ public authorities for
commercial or non-commercial purposes. This initiative (and EU company law in
general) harmonises disclosure requirements and makes company data (which has legal
value) publically available in business registers and in BRIS (transparency) and aims to
enable the use of such data in cross-border situations. In addition, BRIS is out of the
scope of the Open Data Directive as it is a European level inter-connection.
As regards digital means used for cross-border company law procedures,
the eIDAS
Regulation
172
and its revision
173
is very relevant as it provides a regulatory environment
to enable secure and seamless electronic interactions between businesses, citizens and
169
170
Regulation (EU) 2018/1724
Proposal for a REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
establishing a European single access point providing centralised access to publicly available information
of relevance to financial services, capital markets and sustainability (COM/2021/723 final)
171
Directive (EU) 2019/1024
172
Regulation (EU) 910/2014
173
COM(2021) 281 final
146
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0151.png
public authorities, in particular by electronic identification schemes (eIDs) to access
public services in other EU countries and creating a European internal market for
electronic trust services. The Regulation and its revision are closely linked with the
current initiative as they provide the rules on technical means for electronic identification
in company law (as to many other procedures as well). Already the 2019 Digitalisation
Directive refers to the eIDAS Regulation using e-identification and trust services in
company law procedures. The new initiative will have to be aligned with the new digital
means (e.g. the European Digital Identity Wallet) introduced as part of the ongoing
revision of the eIDAS framework. The enhanced digital means in the eIDAS revision
will extend the possibilities also in company law procedures.
Finally, the work has been ongoing and will continue to be developed at EU level as
regards interoperability within the public sector in general. The Commission has been
running interoperability support programmes since 1995, now part of the Digital Europe
Programme. The European Interoperability Framework (EIF) and the Interoperability
Solutions for European Public Administrations (ISA) programme were evaluated recently
in 2020-2021
174
and the Commission put forward the Interoperable Europe Act proposal
and its accompanying Communication to strengthen cross-border interoperability and
cooperation in the public sector across the EU in November 2022
175
.
174
See ISA
2
programme final evaluation, COM/2021/965, SWD/2021/965. EIF final evaluation is to be
published in Q4 2022.
175
New Interoperable Europe Act (europa.eu)
147
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0152.png
A
NNEX
10: O
PTIONS DISCARDED AT AN EARLY STAGE
The following policy options were considered but discarded at an early stage:
a) Making information about co-operatives available via BRIS
In general, from the consultative activities it appeared that there was interest from
stakeholders to have information about cooperatives available at EU level. 45% of those
replying to the public consultation were in favour of having more information about
cooperatives available at EU level; similarly, over 50% of respondents to the supporting
study survey thought that this would be beneficial to a very large or large extent.
However, although a number of Member States have information about cooperatives in
their national companies register
176
, this is not the case for all. For instance, in Spain only
insurance and credit cooperatives are entered into the companies register while others are
kept in a special register for cooperatives (Registro de sociedades cooperativas) or even
in regional registers only. While companies’ registers are all connected to BRIS, there
would be difficulties and costs in practice to connect the information about all
cooperatives to BRIS. This could lead to a situation whereby stakeholders might not be
able to access information about same cooperatives in different Member States, and it
could be difficult or impossible to provide such information through comparable,
multilingual format in BRIS or provide for the cross-border co-operation i.e. cross-border
exchanges.
Furthermore, there can be agricultural, consumers, workers, housing or banking
cooperatives, which may be differently regulated and thus add to the complexity
177
. In
addition, although cooperatives can play an important role in the economy, in particular
in some countries such as Nordic countries
178
, they are less numerous than partnerships
and often of local relevance. Therefore, it appears appropriate to exclude cooperatives
from this initiative and consider them, and possibly other entities, in the future.
b) Interconnecting BRIS with the Land Registers Interconnection (LRI)
This option relates to creating an interconnection between BRIS and the Land Registers
Interconnection (LRI) so that information about real estate assets owned by a particular
company could be also available, as provided by national land or cadastre registers.
However, this interconnection system is still being developed. It is an ongoing project
funded by the European Union’s Justice Programme, which Members States can join on
a voluntary basis
179
. So far, Austria, Estonia and Latvia have joined the platform and the
prospective service is available as a demo, and the objective is for all Member State
176
e.g. AT, DK, FR, LT, LU, NL, NO or PL
Study carried out for the EESC “Recent evolutions of the Social Economy in the European
Union;
Microsoft Word - 17_393_FINAL STUDY (europa.eu)
178
For example, Arla Foods is the fifth-largest dairy company in the world and a cooperative owned by
more than 12500 dairy farmers.
179
https://lri-ms.eu/
177
148
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0153.png
registers to join by 2024
180
. In addition, there was much lower support among
respondents in the consultation activities for this interconnection as compared to
interconnecting BRIS with interconnection of beneficial ownership registers (BORIS) or
of insolvency registers (IRI). For instance, 35% of those replying to the public
consultation thought it would be useful to connect BRIS with the EU interconnection of
land registers as compared to 70% and 61% in favour of connecting with BORIS and IRI,
respectively
181
; some also expressed doubts about the interconnection due to different
subject matter of both systems.
Taking into account the views of stakeholders and that this interconnection is still being
developed, the option was discarded as premature. It appears appropriate to first focus on
interconnecting BRIS with the EU level interconnections that are more developed and to
possibly consider a connection with LRI in the future.
c) Introducing harmonised rules for fully online formation for partnerships
Another discarded option relates to introducing new harmonised rules allowing in
particular for fully online registration of partnerships. In the consultative activities,
stakeholders’ views were mixed. While 42 out of 58 respondents to the public
consultation were in favour, some others raised doubts. In particular, some national
authorities and notaries argued that no new fully online procedures should be introduced
before the fully online registration and filing for limited liability companies, introduced
by the Digitalisation Directive was transposed by Member States and evaluated.
Similarly, in the surveys carried out during the supporting study, responding legal
practitioners and business registers expressed mixed opinions on the extent to which
being able to form a partnership online in all Member States would bring benefits at EU
level
182
.
Taking into account that there was no clear call from stakeholders on this, the option was
eventually discarded as premature – as the existing EU law does not have any
harmonised rules on partnerships (not even on disclosure/information), it appears
appropriate to first focus on harmonising disclosure requirements about those entities in
business registers before any rules on on-line procedures for partnerships would be
introduced. Also, it appears useful to first gain experience from the application of the
rules on fully on-line procedures for limited liability companies under the Digitalisation
Directive.
d) Introducing measures for virtual registered offices at EU level
As set out in the Communication on “Digitalisation of justice in the European Union. A toolbox of
opportunities”; Commission report assessing the necessity and proportionality of harmonising the
information included in the real estate registers and assessing the need for the interconnection of those
registers, COM(2022) 87 final.
181
Similarly, less respondents responding to the surveys for the supporting study were in favour, e.g. 35%
business registers thought that interconnection with the land registers would be to some or large extent
useful as compared to 65% for BORIS and 61% for IRI.
182
[more detailed information to be added from the next report by the contractor]
180
149
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0154.png
Another discarded option relates to introducing certain safeguards in relation to the so
called “virtual registered office”.
Overall, in the consultative activities, views of stakeholders about virtual registered
offices varied. For instance, 45% (17 out of 38) of stakeholders responding to this
question in the public consultation considered the overall impact of companies using
virtual registered offices as negative. Use of virtual registered office to facilitate
fraudulent/abusive behaviour and money laundering were mentioned. On the other hand,
34% (13 out of 38) saw it as a positive and examples such as some reducing overheads
for small companies and start-ups were mentioned. Some doubts about the latter were
also raised by some national authorities.
This option was discarded as premature. The concept of virtual registered office is
complex, and the consultations show that stakeholders understand it in different ways.
The research carried out in the preparatory work for this impact assessment, and in
particular in the supporting study, shows that from a legal perspective, all Member State
business registers require a physical location for a registered office
183
and that therefore,
there are no legal frameworks in place in the EU yet that allow a company to have a fully
virtual registered office. Even under Estonia’s e-residency programme, Estonian law
requires a legal address, a bank account and a contact person residing in Estonia not
allowing in practice the creation of a virtual registered office despite all procedures for
the creation of the company being online. Therefore, it is considered that further research
and consultations are required to fully assess the phenomenon from all different
perspectives before proposing any intervention at EU level.
183
Supporting study
150
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0155.png
A
NNEX
11: B
USINESS
R
EGISTERS
I
NTERCONNECTION SYSTEM
(BRIS)
1.
W
HAT IS
BRIS
BRIS is the mandatory interconnection of all EU Member States’ business registers.
Activated in 2017, BRIS currently covers approximately 16 million limited liability
companies and their branches in the EU. In addition, EEA countries are also connected to
BRIS
184
.
2.
T
HE TWO PURPOSES OF
BRIS
The system serves two purposes:
BRIS provides a webpage on the European e-Justice Portal where anyone can
access official company information in real time.
BRIS is also a secure platform for the exchange of information between EU
business registers.
These two purposes are briefly presented below.
3.
P
UBLIC ACCESS
P
ORTAL
TO COMPANY INFORMATION ON THE
E
UROPEAN
E
-J
USTICE
184
Liechtenstein and Norway
151
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0156.png
The “Find a company” page of the European e-Justice Portal allows anyone (e.g. citizens,
companies, lawyers, notaries, consumers, creditors, authorities) to search and obtain
information on the EU limited liability companies they are interested in and branches of
these companies in other Member States.
The “Find a company” page on the European e-Justice portal provides a user-friendly
welcome page with a search interface that immediately allows users, without any
mandatory registration, to consult company information on multiple countries at the same
time.
After launching a search on a company name or registration number, the system shows a
page displaying all companies that match the search criteria, providing information also
on companies with similar names. When the user clicks on any of the company names in
the search result, the system opens a new page which shows all the information available
on that company, allowing also the user to download company documents made available
by the national business register
185
. The user interface is provided in all EU languages,
and company information and documents are accompanied by labels that provide
additional information in the language of the user, and for example the title and a
description of the company documents available.
185
A payment solution for BRIS is planned for October 2023. Currently, users can download those
documents that business registers make available free of charge on BRIS. For those documents for which
business registers charge a fee, currently the EAP informs the users about the existence of such documents
and provides a multilingual description of its contents.
152
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0157.png
Since the activation of BRIS in 2017, the company information available free of charge
includes:
the company (or cross-border branch) name,
the registration number,
the legal form,
the registered office and
the Member State of registration.
Most recently, the Digitalisation Directive and the Mobility Directive expanded the scope
of the company information available on the “Find a company” page of European the e-
Justice Portal (this is gradually being introduced by Member States):
legal representatives,
a list of the cross-border branches opened by a company,
company status,
company object,
company website, and
information on any cross-border merger, conversion or division procedure taking
place.
4.
E
XCHANGE OF INFORMATION BETWEEN BUSINESS REGISTERS
The second purpose of BRIS is to provide a platform where business registers exchange
information.
Since the activation of BRIS in 2017, BRIS is the means for business registers to
exchange the following information as structured data:
153
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
A notification from the business register of the company to the business register of
the branch in a different Member State, on the opening/termination of any winding-
up/insolvency proceedings of the company, and on the striking-off of the company
from the register. This way, the register of the branch is updated and can provide
correct information to the public for transparency reasons (and delete the branch
where applicable).
A notification from the register of the company resulting from a merger to the cross-
border register in which any other company involved in the merger were required to
file documents, that the cross-border merger has taken effect. This way, the business
registers of the companies taking part in the merger is updated and can provide
correct information to the public for transparency reasons.
Most recently, the Digitalisation Directive and the Mobility Directive expanded also the
scope of this co-operation and exchange of information to cover:
cross-border conversions of companies registered in different Member States,
cross-border divisions of companies registered in different Member States,
disqualified directors, and
cross-border branches opened and closed in different Member States (notification
of opening or closing of a cross-border branch to the (parent) company in the
other Member State).
This annex uses images from Flaticon.com
154
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0159.png
A
NNEX
12: O
VERVIEW OF NATIONAL RULES
1.
P
ARTNERSHIPS
In nearly all Member States, there are, at least
186
, two types of partnerships, typically
general (unlimited) and limited partnerships which have very similar features. In all of
them, the General Partnership has at least two partners with unlimited liability and no
minimum capital contribution is required. Limited Partnerships are usually defined as
having two types of partners: general partners with unlimited liability who are generally
responsible for the administration and representation of the company; and limited
partners, whose liability is limited to their contributions to the company who are not
usually responsible for the administration and representation of the company.
In the majority of Member States, the information disclosed in business registers on
General and Limited Partnerships is very similar (e.g. registration number, name of the
company, legal form, registered office, legal representatives/partners having the power to
represent the company, etc.). All Member States disclose information about general
partners. In more than a half of the Member States, partnerships are required to submit to
the business register the instruments of constitution
187
and the accounting documents
188
.
2.
G
ROUPS OF COMPANIES
In some Member States, the business registers provide information indicating whether
the company is member of a group or a parent company
189
. In Italy, subsidiaries have a
duty to disclose the existence of the parent company (not of the intermediate companies)
in the business register
190
. In some Member States
191
, it is possible to access for a fee an
overview of the complete group structure. In a few Member States
192
, the focus is on
public limited liability companies and on groups based on contractual agreements
between companies, even if usually, such agreements reinforce an already existing de
facto control based on a majority shareholding. Sometimes Member States provide only
indirect means of verifying the group structure, such as disclosure of information on the
shareholders of the company
193
, or disclosure of data about direct or indirect ways of
186
E.g. in BE, DE, EL, ES, IT, HR, LU, NL, PL and RO, there are more types of partnerships that the
general and the limited partnership while in IE there is only one; Supporting study.
187
There are some Member States that do not have to file their instruments of constitution, e.g. in AT, CY,
DE, EE, NL and SE; Supporting study.
188
E.g. in AT, BE, CY, DE, EE, EL, FI, FR, HR, IT, MT and NL, partnerships do not have to fill
accounting documents or they do but only in particular circumstances, such as where all members are
LLCs (e.g. in EL, FR or HR); Supporting study.
189
E.g. in AT, HU, IT, LV, NL and SI; Supporting study (country fiches).
190
ICLEG report on transparency.
191
E.g. in NL, HU, PT; ICLEG report on transparency and supporting study.
192
E.g. in DE, HR and PT; ICLEG report on transparency and supporting study.
193
E.g. in AT, BG, CY, CZ, DE, DK, LT, LU, MT, PT and RO; Supporting study (country fiches).
155
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0160.png
exercising control over the company
194
. Finally, some Member States do not disclose any
kind of information on groups
195
.
3.
E
X
-
ANTE SCRUTINY
Regarding the content of such scrutiny for
limited liability companies,
Member States
have divergent rules. Most frequent scrutiny checks carried out in more than half of the
Member States cover the authenticity of signatures on the application
196
, the legal
capacity of the applicants
197
and the authority of the applicant(s) to represent the
company
198
. However, in some cases, the responsibility to submit accurate information
lies with the company
199
. In more than a half of the Member States the legality of the
company name is verified
200
, and in more than 10 Member States, the legality of the
object and of the instruments of constitution is verified as well
201
.
In relation to the ex-ante scrutiny process applies to
partnerships,
the number and type
of scrutiny checks is quite similar to that of LLCs, i.e. in terms of checking the
authenticity of the application, the legal capacity and the authority to represent the
company. However, the intensity of checks on these companies is significantly lower
than that of limited liability companies in some Member States due to the absence of the
instruments of incorporation
202
or the lack of notarial certification and that the
consequent ex-ante scrutiny is performed by legal professionals
203
.
As to
actors responsible for verifying the company information,
in the vast majority
of Member States that conducts ex-ante verifications, these are carried out by the
business registers
204
or there is a double scrutiny process carried out by both the business
registers and the notaries
205
. In HU, such double check is carried out by lawyers or
notaries and the business register. In some Member States, the checks are carried out
mainly by notaries
206
. In other Member States, other actors might also be involved. For
example, in CY, the verification is carried out by lawyers and the company secretaries or
authorised partners of the companies that submit the application, and it is considered as
194
195
E.g. in BE, BG, FI, HR, and SE; Supporting study (country fiches).
E.g. in BG, DK, EE, FI, DE, FR, IE, LT, LU, MT, PL, RO, SK and SE; Supporting study.
196
E.g. in AT, BG, CZ, DE, EE, ES, FI, FR, HR, HU, IT, LT, NL, PL, RO, SE, SI and SK; Supporting
study.
197
E.g. in AT, BE, BG, CY, CZ, DE, ES, FI, HR, HU, IT, NL, PL, RO, SE, and SI; Supporting study.
198
E.g. in AT, BG, CZ, DE, EE, ES, FI, FR, HR, HU, IT, NL, PL, RO, SE, SI, and SK; Supporting study.
199
E.g. in IE; ICLEG report on use of data.
200
E.g. in AT, BG, CY, DE, EE, EL, ES, FI, HR, HU, IE, IT, NL, SE, and SI; Supporting study.
201
E.g. There is an ex ante check of the legality of the object in BG, CZ, ES, FI, HR, IT, NL, PL, RO, SE
and SI; on the other hand, in BG, CY, DE, EE, ES, FI, FR, HR, HU, IT, LT, NL, SE, and SI, there is also
an ex ante legality check of the instruments of constitution; Supporting study.
202
E.g. in AT, CY, DE, EE, NL and SE; Supporting study.
203
E.g. in BE, LT, LU and NL; Supporting study.
204
E.g in EL, FI, FR, IE, LV, MT, PT and SE; In Portugal, notaries or lawyers perform the scrutiny if they
are the ones preparing the registration; Supporting study.
205
E.g in AT, DE, BE, BG, ES, HR, IT, NL, RO; In NL, notaries are involved where limited liability
companies are registered and in case of notarised partnership contracts, but not otherwise as a matter of
course; Supporting study.
206
E.g. in LU and CZ; Supporting study.
156
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0161.png
their responsibility to ensure the correctness of the under scrutiny information
207
. For
some Member States, third parties are involved, such as banks or auditors to verify
certain information
208
. Yet, other approaches are also used. For example, in DK and IT, a
system is used to carry out automatic checks during a mandatory self-registration,
whereby a confirmation of registration is sent by email to the natural person allowing
them to react in case the registration is unlawful or incorrect
209
.
207
208
Supporting study and ICLEG report on use of company information.
E.g. in AT, DK and LU, this verification concerns the payment of cash contributions; Supporting study.
209
ICLEG report on use of company information.
157
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0162.png
A
NNEX
13: T
HE
SME T
EST
– S
UMMARY OF RESULTS
(1) Preliminary assessment of businesses likely to be affected
The planned initiative, as the already existing EU company law acquis,
does not make a distinction between SMEs and larger companies and all
companies fall under its scope of application. Therefore, the needs of and
impacts on SMEs are analysed throughout the impact assessment.
(See section 2 (problems), 6
(impact and comparison of
policy options)
and 7
(preferred option), Annex 2
with a synopsis report on
The consultation activities showed that SMEs encountered difficulties consultations and Annex 4 on
when looking for information about companies in other Member States methodology)
and confirmed obstacles faced when setting-up subsidiaries or branches,
or in other cross-border situations (including the need to resubmit
company data, legalisation/apostille, certified translation).
As SMEs account for 98-99% of limited liability companies in the EU
and it is estimated that around 40% of SMEs are engaged in cross-border
activities, they will particularly benefit from the expected administrative
burden reduction (of more than EUR 437 million per year). The
measures, including the resulting increased legal certainty, will also
positively impact SMEs, as they do not have the financial and
administrative resources of large companies and are, thus, more affected
by unclear and complex rules.
The initiative will also benefit start-ups, as it responds to the calls to
facilitate the expansion of start-ups in the EU Start-up Nations Standard.
(2) Consultation with SMEs representatives
SME representatives were widely consulted during the preparatory
process for this impact assessment. A specific targeted consultation of
SMEs was carried out through an SME panel survey. For details on the
results please see Annex 14. In addition, companies, and in particular
SMEs, were also contacted during other consultation activities, i.e. the
public consultation, a specific survey for companies and a specific
workshop with companies in the context of the study supporting the IA.
(3) Measurement of the impact on SMEs
The planned initiative is of relevance to SMEs, as it will contribute to the
objectives of the 2020 SME Strategy, which mentioned that the
Commission would assess the need for additional company law measures
to facilitate cross-border expansion and scale-up by SMEs.
The specific objectives of this initiative (to increase the amount and
improve the reliability of company data available in business registers
and/or through the Business Registers Interconnection System (BRIS)
and enable direct use of this data in cross-border situations) are both very
relevant for SMEs as access to company data and its use has a strong
impact on SMEs’ cross-border activities. One of the overall objectives of
this initiative is also to achieve easier cross-border expansion for SMEs.
(See sections 6 (impact and
comparison of policy options)
and 7 (preferred option), and
Annex 4 on methodology)
(See Annex 2 with a synopsis
report
on
consultations;
references to SMEs’ views are
also made throughout the IA,
in particular when describing
problems and when assessing
policy options)
158
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0163.png
Therefore, the impacts on companies, and in particular SMEs, are
measured in all policy options.
4) Assess alternative options and mitigating measures
According to the assessment, the benefits in terms of administrative
burden reduction on companies, and in particular on SMEs, are expected
to much outweigh the one-off adjustment costs and the initiative is
expected to bring significant burden reduction for companies and in
particular SMEs. Therefore, there is no need for specific measures to ease
compliance for SMEs in line with the proportionality principle.
(See sections 6 (impact and
comparison of policy options)
and 7 (preferred option), and
Annex 4 on methodology)
159
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0164.png
A
NNEX
14: R
ESULTS OF THE
SME
PANEL CONSULTATION ON
U
PGRADING DIGITAL COMPANY LAW
1.
B
ACKGROUND
This SME panel consultation is linked to the preparatory work on a new legislative
initiative on “Upgrading digital company law”
210
, planned for adoption by the
Commission in Q1 2023. This initiative will aim to: (i) enhance access at EU level to
information about companies in the national business registers; (ii) facilitate the
expansion to other Member States’ markets and reduce administrative burden by making
it possible for companies to directly (without extra formalities) use company information
from their national business registers when, for example, setting up subsidiaries or
branches, or dealing with authorities or courts in other Member States; and (iii) further
digitalise the existing EU company law procedures.
Companies, and in particular small and medium-sized companies (SMEs), are one of the
main stakeholders of this initiative. That is why it was important for the Commission
services to gather information about SMEs’ needs and about obstacles they encounter in
the areas covered by this initiative. The questions focused on situations when SMEs:
look for information about business partners in another Member State,
want to open a branch or subsidiary in another Member State or
need to provide information about their company to administrative authorities or
courts in another Member State.
The questionnaire did not focus on specific sectors but was targeted at SMEs, which
already have or plan to have cross-border experiences, such as e.g. business partners, an
establishment/place of business, or contacts with authorities or courts in another Member
State.
2.
S
HORT SUMMARY OF THE RESULTS OF THE SURVEY
2.1. O
VERVIEW OF RESPONDENTS
In total, 158 stakeholders replied to this public consultation in the EU Survey webpage.
Majority of responses were submitted by limited liability companies; 64% by private
limited liability ones (99 out of 155
211
) and 14% by public (22 out of 155). 5% of replies
came from partnerships (8) and 3% - from cooperatives (5). 10% of respondents were
self-employed (16). The “other” category included, e.g. a business association or a
technology centre.
210
211
Upgrading digital company law (europa.eu)
3 respondents did not provide information.
160
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0165.png
Most responses came from Portugal, followed by Romania, Spain, Czechia and Poland.
There were a few replies from Hungary and Italy, and a couple or individual responses
from some other Member States (Cyprus and Germany, and Austria, Bulgaria and
Lithuania, respectively).
In terms of their
size,
39%
212
were micro enterprises or self-employed (1 to 9
employees), 32% small (10 to 49 employees), 22% medium (50 to 249 employees), and
7% mid-cap and bigger companies (250 or more employees). 25% of respondents who
answered this question were part of a group of companies (39 out of 153). In a few cases,
212
As for the previous question, 3 respondents did not provide information.
161
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0166.png
their parent companies were located in another Member State (6) or in a non-EU country
(8)
213
and otherwise, they were in the same Member State.
2.2. S
ETTING
UP AN ESTABLISHMENT
/
PLACE OF BUSINESS AND CONTACTS WITH
AUTHORITIES AND COURTS IN OTHER
M
EMBER
S
TATES
13% of those who responded already have an
establishment/place of business in
another Member State
(19 out of 151), 9% are planning to have one (14) whereas 5%
tried but gave up (7) and a majority did not have or did not plan to have one such an
establishment or place of business (73%, 111). Two respondents who tried to set up an
establishment abroad mentioned administrative obstacles and burden as a reason for
giving up. Establishments were set up abroad or planned mainly by the responding
private and public limited liability companies. For instance, 11 private limited liability
company respondents had cross-border establishments, 12 were planning to have one and
7 gave up trying to set one up, and 7 public limited liability companies already had
establishments abroad, while no responding partnerships had/planned to have any
establishments and only 2 cooperatives had/planned to have one.
In terms of
type of establishment/place of business in another Member State,
among
those who replied in affirmative
214
, 50% mentioned a subsidiary (20 out of 40), 25% a
branch (10) and 3 referred to other type of establishment/place of businesses
215
.
When asked about types of
difficulties encountered when setting up an
establishment/place of business in another Member State,
the respondents who
replied in affirmative mentioned that company information/documents had to be legally
certified to be valid in another Member State (apostille) (20 out of 40) and that
certified/sworn translation of company documents/information was needed (19); 13 also
mentioned that they could not use the information/documents from their company’s
213
214
As regards non-EU countries, examples of Switzerland, Moldova, Ukraine and Taiwan were mentioned.
I.e. who already had an establishment abroad, planned to have one or tried but gave up.
215
One respondent mentioned a franchise in that context.
162
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0167.png
business register (non-recognition). 13 mentioned other difficulties and 13 encountered
none. 60% of those answering to this question faced administrative costs or time
consuming procedures linked to such difficulties encountered (15 out of 25) and 40% did
not. Costs for legal advice (e.g. from lawyers or notaries), translations, authentication and
certification costs were mentioned by a few respondents in this context.
As regards
difficulties when dealing with other authorities (e.g. tax or labour
authorities) in other Member States,
33% of those who replied in affirmative
mentioned the need for certified/sworn translations of company information/documents
(9 out of 40), 22% referred to the need for legal certification of documents (6), 7% to
other difficulties (2)
216
and 1 to non-recognition of documents from their company’s
business register. 33% replied that they did not face any difficulties (9 out of 40). 64% of
those answering to this question faced administrative costs or time consuming procedures
linked to such difficulties (14 out of 22) and 36% did not (8). Similarly as in case of
setting-up a subsidiary or a branch, costs of legal advice, translations, administrative fees,
authentication and certification costs were mentioned by a few respondents.
17% of respondents were involved in court proceedings in another Member State (18 out
of 104) and 83% were not (86). As regards
difficulties faced in such cross-border
court proceedings,
53% of those who were involved in court proceedings and answered
to this question, mentioned that certified/sworn translation of company
information/documents was needed (9 out of 17), 18% that information/documents had to
be legally certified to be valid and that it was not possible to use documents already
available in the company’s business register (3 each), and one respondent mentioned
other difficulties. 1 respondent did not face any difficulties. 7 respondents faced
administrative costs or time consuming procedures linked to such difficulties and 8 did
not.
In general, many respondents did not reply to questions about cross-border difficulties,
which reflects the fact that only some of the respondents had cross-border experiences
with setting up branches/subsidiaries or with dealing with authorities/courts, as shown in
replies to those questions above.
When asked whether certain
measures could help their company when setting up
subsidiaries/branches or in contacts with authorities/courts in other Member States,
there was strong positive feedback from a majority of private and public limited liability
companies
217
who expressed their opinion. 68 out of 75 of respondents thought that
having
less formalities
(for example, through the use of digital solutions applied by
authorities thus reducing the need of legal certification of company data in procedures)
would help their company; and only 7 did not think this would be of help. Similarly,
respondents thought that introducing a
common digital company information extract
and
not having to resubmit the information
already available in their company’s
business register would help their company (64 out of 72, and 65 out of 70,
216
One respondent mentioned the need for advice by a local expert and another one - administrative burden
in that context.
217
Focus on private and public limited liability companies for these two questions as respondents from
those categories appeared to have most experience with setting up of subsidiaries/branches cross-border.
163
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0168.png
respectively)
218
. Only 8 and 5 respondents, respectively, thought that these measures
would not help at all.
As to
impact that such possible measures could have on costs for their companies,
in
general more private and public limited liability companies who shared their opinion
thought that these would lead to a significant or small cost decrease than to a significant
or small cost increase. For instance, as regards having less formalities, 49 out of 73
respondents expected a significant or small cost decrease as compared to 21 who
expected a significant or small cost increase, and 3 who thought that this would not have
an impact.
2.3. S
EARCHING FOR INFORMATION ABOUT COMPANIES IN OTHER
M
EMBER
S
TATES
54% of respondents who answered this question already have
business partners in
other Member States
(74 out of 138) as compared to 35% who do not (49). 11%
mentioned that they tried but gave up finding business partners abroad (15). Some
respondents mentioned difficulty in transferring or accessing information or formalities
in that context.
218
This includes views of respondents who thought that these measures would help their company to a very
large, large or some extent.
164
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0169.png
As regards
sources of information about companies in other Member States,
45% of
those who replied search for information on companies’ websites (58 out of 128), 16% in
other Member State business registers (21), 4% on “find a company page” of e-Justice
portal (5) and 17% use other sources (22), including national trade promotion agencies,
Enterprise Europe Network, credit insurance companies, or their own networks and
contacts, e.g. with other entrepreneurs, local partners, customers or suppliers, or fairs and
events organised for the sector. 14% respondents did not know where to find information
about companies in other Member States (18) and a small number 3% did not need such
information at all (4).
In terms of
difficulties faced when looking for company information in other
Member States,
most respondents who answered encountered some difficulties; only
13% did not (14 out of 110). 15% of respondents could not find or access the relevant
company information at all (17); 19% could only find the relevant information on
companies’ websites (21) and 12% only in national business registers of those companies
(13). A number of other problems were mentioned, including difficulty to search on
registers’ websites (11%; 12 out of 110); need to pay for company information (10%;
11); technical (8%; 9) and language (6%; 7) difficulties. 4 respondents mentioned that
company information in registers was not sufficiently reliable.
219
When asked whether certain
measures could help their company when looking for
information about companies from other Member States,
there was strong positive
feedback from a majority of respondents who expressed their opinion. The highest
support was expressed for having
comparable information about additional legal
219
In the survey, respondents could only choose one reply and that is why numbers of replies per difficulty
are low.
165
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
2685286_0170.png
entities
(e.g. partnerships) available at EU level (115 out of 117) and
improving the
search for company information at EU level
through the Business Register
Interconnection System, BRIS (113 out of 115). There were also majorities in favour of
raising awareness about information at EU level through BRIS (110 out of 113), and
having basic information about groups (111 out of 113), about companies’ place of
management (109 out of 114) and place of the main economic activity (112 out of 113)
available
220
. In general, only very few respondents thought that such measures would not
help in looking for company information cross-border.
220
This includes views of respondents who thought that these measures would help their company to a very
large, large or some extent.
166
kom (2023) 0177 - Ingen titel
A
NNEX
15: L
IST OF MEETINGS
U
NDER TARGETED
CONSULTATIONS AND VIRTUAL MEETINGS
24 June 2022 – Meeting of DG JUST with the European Trade Union
Confederation (ETUC)
24 June 2022 – Meeting of DG JUST with BusinessEurope
4 July 2022 – Meeting of DG JUST with the Council of the Notariats of the
European Union (CNUE)
7 July 2022 - Virtual meeting of DG JUST with a lawyer specialised in company
law (Poland)
13 July 2022 - Virtual meeting of DG JUST with a lawyer specialised in company
law (Spain)
18 August 2022- – Virtual meeting of DG JUST with a legal counsel of an
important European manufacturer group (Belgium)
26 August 2022 - Virtual meeting of DG JUST with a legal counsel of a major
European manufacturer group (Netherlands)
29 August 2022 - Virtual meeting of DG JUST with legal counsels of a major
European group (services) (Belgium)
167